JP2016209248A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To reduce generation of electric waves which are received by other devices while reducing time necessary for a control.SOLUTION: A presentation control CPU transmits a display on-command, via a VDP in a display control part, to a display driver of each image display device by a serial communication of which clock frequency becomes a specific frequency. And, the presentation control CPU, after transmitting the display on-command, decreases the clock frequency of the serial communication to a non-communication time frequency that is lower than the specific frequency.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 30

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that performs a game.

  As a gaming machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and the game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area and a start condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of identification are made. Information is variably displayed on a variable display device (hereinafter also referred to as “variable” or “variable display”), and the game result is determined by a so-called variable display game that determines whether or not to give a predetermined game value based on the display result. There is a pachinko machine that has improved In such a pachinko gaming machine, a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player is obtained when the stop symbol mode when the variable display of the display symbol in the variable display game is completely stopped becomes the specific display mode. . For example, a pachinko gaming machine that has become a big hit game state has a special electric accessory called a big prize opening or an attacker opened, and a state where a player can easily win a game ball for a certain period of time continuously. provide.

  In addition, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a game medium such as a medal, a coin, or a game ball similar to a pachinko gaming machine, the player operates the start lever to display on the variable display device. The variable display of the display symbol is started within the range of the maximum delay time determined in advance from the operation timing by starting the variable display of the symbol and the player operating the stop button provided corresponding to each variable display device. And a winning is generated according to the display result derived when the variable display of all the variable display devices is stopped, and a predetermined game medium predetermined according to the winning is paid out, and a specific winning is generated. In some cases, there is a slot machine configured to change the gaming state to a state in which a predetermined gaming value is given to the player.

  As an example of such a gaming machine, an image is displayed on a liquid crystal display by controlling a display driver in accordance with a plurality of types of display drive modes specified corresponding to a signal state supplied to an external setting terminal. Is disclosed (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-070854 A

  In the technique described in Patent Document 1, control data is serially communicated to a display driver in order to set a display drive mode (communication in which data is sequentially transmitted and received in synchronization with a clock signal whose period can be specified according to a signal voltage). ) Is generally transmitted. In this case, when the clock frequency, which is the frequency of the clock signal (the signal whose cycle can be specified according to the signal voltage) transmitted to synchronize the display driver or the control data transmission device with each other, is low, the communication speed is reduced. There is a problem in that it takes a long time to complete. For this reason, in order to increase the communication speed, it is necessary to increase the clock frequency, but when the clock frequency is increased, other communication devices receive from the device that transmits the clock signal (display driver, control data transmission device). High frequency radio waves may be generated, and noise may be generated in output depending on the communication device.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the generation of radio waves received by other devices while reducing the time required for control.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention provides:
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine 1001) for performing a game,
Transmission means for transmitting data (for example, processing 120 for effect control CPU 120 of effect control unit 126 and VDP 362 of display control unit 123 serially communicates with display drivers 402 and 402a to 402d of image display devices 5 and 5a to 5d. The sub CPU 1091a of the sub control unit 91 performs serial communication with the liquid crystal display 1051),
Receiving means for receiving data (for example, display drivers 402, 402a to 402d of each of the image display devices 5, 5a to 5d, a process in which the liquid crystal display 1051 performs serial communication),
The transmission means includes
Data can be transmitted by serial communication (for example, serial communication by the serial signal lines of the signal line groups 128, 129a to 129d) that sequentially transmits data in synchronization with a clock signal whose period can be specified according to the signal voltage,
When a specific condition (for example, when power is turned on or when demo switching is started) is satisfied, data (for example, a display-on command) with a clock frequency that is a period that can be specified by the clock signal as a specific frequency (for example, a specific frequency) (For example, the production control CPU 120 executes the process of step S904),
After the data is transmitted with the clock frequency as the specific frequency, the clock frequency is made lower than the specific frequency (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step S905).

  According to such a configuration, since the transmission unit transmits data to the reception unit with the clock frequency as the specific frequency, the transmission unit transmits data to the reception unit with the clock frequency lower than the specific frequency. The time required for control is reduced compared to a gaming machine. In addition, according to such a configuration, the clock frequency is made lower than the specific frequency after data is transmitted, so that other devices receive the game machine that does not make the clock frequency lower than the specific frequency after data is transmitted. Reduces the generation of high frequency radio waves. As a result, the generation of radio waves received by other devices is reduced while reducing the time required for control.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The clock frequency may be set to the specific frequency between the time when it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied and the time when the specific condition is satisfied (for example, after transmission of a reset signal before starting demo switching) (for example, The effect control CPU 120 may execute steps S614, S615, and S905.

  According to such a configuration, the clock frequency is not set when it is not necessary to set the clock frequency to the specific frequency until it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied. The generation of high-frequency radio waves received by other devices than the gaming machine that sets the clock frequency to a specific frequency before the condition is satisfied is reduced.

(3) In the above gaming machine (1) or (2),
When the clock frequency is changed from a frequency different from the specific frequency (for example, a frequency during non-transmission) to the specific frequency, a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the change to the specific frequency. The data transmission may be started later (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may execute the processes of steps S901 to S904).

  According to such a configuration, since the clock signal at the time of serial communication is stable, the accuracy of transmitting data from a gaming machine that does not start transmitting data after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change to the specific frequency. Will improve.

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
The transmission means may receive another reception different from the reception means at a time (for example, during a game) different from a time (for example, when power is turned on or when demo switching is started) to the reception means. Data may be transmitted with the clock frequency lower than the specific frequency to the means (for example, the process in which each motor drive circuit and movable means drive circuit 1099 performs serial communication) (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control). During the game, the drive control command may be transmitted to each motor drive circuit at the non-transmission frequency. When the sub control unit 1091 does not transmit the drive control command to the movable means drive circuit 1099 or the like during the game May be transmitted at the same frequency).

  According to such a configuration, the data is transmitted at an excessive communication speed to the other receiving means than the gaming machine that does not transmit data with the clock frequency lower than the specific frequency to the other receiving means. That will be reduced. Further, according to such a configuration, since data is transmitted to other receiving means at a time different from the time when data is transmitted to the receiving means, the clock frequency is set to the other receiving means. Transmission of data as a specific frequency can be prevented, and generation of high frequency radio waves received by other devices than other gaming machines that transmit data using a clock frequency as a specific frequency for other receiving means. To reduce.

(5) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (4),
The receiving means includes display means (for example, each image) including a display panel (for example, liquid crystal panels 401, 401a to 401d) and a display driver (for example, display drivers 402, 402a to 402d) for driving the display panel. Included in the display devices 5, 5a to 5d),
The transmission unit is included in a display control unit (for example, the display control unit 123) that controls the display unit.
The display driver sets the display panel in a displayable state (for example, a display on state) when the receiving unit receives a display permission signal (for example, a display on command) as data (for example, displays) A process in which the drivers 402 and 402a to 402d control the liquid crystal panels 401 and 401a to 401d to the display-on state),
The display control means may transmit the display permission signal to the display driver by the transmission means in order to perform control for displaying the effect by the display means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 The process of step S904 may be executed via the VDP 362 of the display control unit 123).

  According to such a configuration, the display control means transmits the display permission signal to the display driver by the transmission means when the control for displaying the effect is performed, and the display driver receives the display permission signal by the reception means. Since the display panel is sometimes displayed, the display panel can be displayed when an effect is actually displayed, and the effect can be displayed appropriately.

(6) In the gaming machine of (5) above,
The display control means transmits the display permission signal again when a predetermined condition in the game is established as the specific condition after transmitting the display permission signal by the transmitting means (for example, at the start of demo switching). (For example, the production control CPU 120 may transmit a display-on command at the start of demo switching).

  According to such a configuration, even if the state of the display panel changes after the display control means transmits the display permission signal by the transmission means, the display permission signal is transmitted again. Can be displayed again.

(7) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (6),
Movable means (for example, movable means 1901 to 1903);
Movable means control means for controlling the operation of the movable means (for example, processing in which the sub-control unit 91 controls the movable means 1901 to 1903);
Accepting means for accepting the player's operation (for example, player side setting switch 70);
Specific control execution means (for example, processing in which the player-side setting switch 70 displays the setting screen) that performs specific control (display of the setting screen) in response to reception of the receiving means;
The movable means control means is a confirmation operation control means for controlling the confirmation operation of the movable means (for example, the sub-control unit moves the movable means 901 to 903 to the movable positions 921 to 923, and thereafter to the initial positions 911 to 913. Processing to move)
The specific control executing means executes the specific control even if the accepting means accepts a player's operation during the confirming action execution period in which the confirming action control means controls the confirming action of the movable means. There is no need (for example, the sub-control unit may execute the processes of steps S1151 and S1153).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent specific control from being performed while the movable member is operating.

(8) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (7),
Movable means (for example, movable means 1901 to 1903);
Movable means control means for controlling the operation of the movable means (for example, processing in which the sub-control unit 91 controls the movable means 1901 to 1903);
Accepting means for accepting the player's operation (for example, player side setting switch 70);
Specific control execution means (for example, processing in which the player-side setting switch 70 displays the setting screen) for performing specific control (display of the setting screen) in response to reception of the receiving means;
A reception notification means (for example, the process of step S1204 executed by the sub-control unit 91) for notifying that the player's operation can be received;
The movable means control means is a confirmation operation control means for controlling the confirmation operation of the movable means (for example, the sub-control unit moves the movable means 901 to 903 to the movable positions 921 to 923, and thereafter to the initial positions 911 to 913. Processing to move)
The acceptance notification means may not notify that the player's operation can be accepted during the confirmation operation execution period, which is a period during which the confirmation operation control means controls the confirmation operation of the movable means ( For example, the sub-control unit may execute the processes of steps S1202, S1205, and S1206).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from performing specific control operations while the movable member is operating.

(9) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (8),
In the gaming machine further comprising variable display means (for example, reels 1002L, 1002C, and 1002R) for variably displaying the identification information, and giving game value according to the display result derived and displayed on the variable display means.
Grant information output means (for example, an external output board 2000 executed by the main control unit 1041) that outputs grant information (eg, medal OUT signal) that can specify the game value given when the game value is given. Processing to output the medal OUT signal externally),
An anomaly detecting means for detecting an anomaly related to the game (for example, a process of detecting an anomaly executed by the main control unit 1041);
Abnormality information output means for outputting abnormality information when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, processing for externally outputting a security signal via the external output board 2000 executed by the main control unit 1041);
The abnormality information output means includes
When abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means at a predetermined timing within a period from the start of variable display of identification information to the end of the provision of game value, the abnormality information is output after the end of the game value provision. (For example, when an abnormality is detected at a predetermined timing within a period from when the main control unit 1041 starts the game until the end of the medal grant, a payout process is ended and a security signal is output to the outside).
The output of the abnormality information may be started before the output of the grant information output according to the grant of the game value is completed (for example, before the main control unit 1041 completes the external output of the medal OUT signal) Security signal may be externally output).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the gaming value given in a situation where an abnormality has occurred. Further, it is possible to distinguish between “abnormalities in the game” instead of “abnormalities immediately after the game”.

(10) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (9) above,
In the gaming machine further comprising variable display means (for example, reels 1002L, 1002C, and 1002R) for variably displaying the identification information, and giving game value according to the display result derived and displayed on the variable display means.
Grant information output means (for example, an external output board 2000 executed by the main control unit 1041) that outputs grant information (eg, medal OUT signal) that can specify the game value given when the game value is given. Processing to output the medal OUT signal externally),
An anomaly detecting means for detecting an anomaly related to the game (for example, a process of detecting an anomaly executed by the main control unit 1041);
Abnormality information output means for outputting abnormality information when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, processing for externally outputting a security signal via the external output board 2000 executed by the main control unit 1041);
The abnormality information output means includes
When abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means at a predetermined timing within a period from the start of the provision of the game value to the end of the provision of the game value, the abnormality information is output after the end of the provision of the game value (For example, when the main control unit 1041 detects an abnormality during the payout process, the security signal is externally output after the payout process is completed).
The output of the abnormality information may be started before the output of the grant information output according to the grant of the game value is completed (for example, before the main control unit 1041 completes the external output of the medal OUT signal) Security signal may be externally output).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the gaming value given in a situation where an abnormality has occurred. Further, it is possible to distinguish “abnormality during payout” instead of “abnormality immediately after payout”.

(11) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (10) above,
It further comprises variable display means (for example, reels 1002L, 1002C, 1002R) that variably displays identification information by setting the number of bets using the game value, and the display result derived and displayed on the variable display means is replayed. (For example, replay), in the gaming machine in which the bet number is set without newly using the game value,
Information output means for outputting information when the bet number is set according to the replay (for example, processing for externally outputting the medal OUT signal via the external output board 2000 executed by the main control unit 1041);
An anomaly detecting means for detecting an anomaly related to the game (for example, a process of detecting an anomaly executed by the main control unit 1041);
Abnormality information output means for outputting abnormality information when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, processing for externally outputting a security signal via the external output board 2000 executed by the main control unit 1041);
The abnormality information output means includes
If an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means at a predetermined timing within a period from the start of variable display of identification information to the setting of the bet number according to the replay, the bet number corresponding to the replay is determined. After setting, the abnormality information is output (for example, when the abnormality is detected at a predetermined timing within a period from when the main control unit 1041 starts the game until the betting number processing by the replay winning is finished, the betting number processing is ended. And output a security signal externally)
The output of the abnormality information may be started before the output of the information output in accordance with the setting of the betting number of the replay is completed (for example, the main control unit 1041 completes the external output of the medal OUT signal) The security signal may be output externally before).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the gaming value given in a situation where an abnormality has occurred. Further, it is possible to distinguish between “abnormalities in the game” instead of “abnormalities immediately after the game”.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a first embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an internal configuration diagram of an effect control unit, a display control unit, a signal separation board, a main image display device, and a sub image display device. It is a block diagram which shows the connection state of an effect control board | substrate, a signal separation board | substrate, and a sub image display apparatus. It is a block diagram of the input side board | substrate in a signal separation board | substrate. It is a block diagram of the output side board | substrate in a signal separation board | substrate. It is a block diagram of a liquid crystal control board. It is a block diagram of a harness. It is a figure which shows arrangement | positioning of the magnet in a sub image display apparatus, and arrangement | positioning of the magnet of the display apparatus of a comparative example. It is a figure which shows the state which rotated the sub image display apparatus of FIG. 10 180 degrees. It is a figure which shows the state which the sub image display apparatuses contacted. It is a figure which shows an example of LED arrangement | positioning of the edge part of a sub image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a figure for demonstrating random value MR1-MR3. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a special figure holding | maintenance memory | storage part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table and a jackpot classification determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit variation pattern determination table and a small hit variation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a display initialization command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a display drive control main process. It is a timing chart which shows an example, such as a reset signal and the transmission timing of a display-on command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a display on command transmission process. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the relationship between a display on command and the clock frequency of serial communication. It is a figure which shows an example of the processing content after receiving the production control command by the production control board side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the message effect process in a variable display effect process. It is a figure which shows an example of the sub image display apparatus aspect table which shows a response | compatibility with the number of steps of a stepping motor, the coordinates of the four corners of a sub image display apparatus, and the edge LED which is made to turn off during execution of a synchronous display effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the image display in the message effect process in a variable display effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sub image effect process in the effect process during variable display. It is a figure which shows an example of the image display in the sub image effect process in a variable display effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sub image effect process in the process at the time of a special winning opening normally open. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the image display in the sub image effect process in the process at the time of a special winning opening normally open | release. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the synchronous display effect process in a variable display effect process. It is a figure which shows an example of the image display (when each sub image display apparatus adjoins a main image display apparatus) in a synchronous display effect process. It is a figure which shows the mode of lighting / extinguishing of LED of the edge part when each sub image display apparatus adjoins a main image display apparatus during execution of a synchronous display effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the image display (when a part of each sub image display apparatus superimposes on a main image display apparatus) in a synchronous display effect process. It is a figure which shows an example of the image display (when all the sub image display apparatuses superimpose on a main image display apparatus) in a synchronous display effect process. FIG. 6 is a front view of the slot machine according to the second embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows a shop side setting switch. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of a movable means. Confirmation operation execution period of movable means, period for prohibiting input acceptance of player side setting switch, period for turning off player side setting switch, period for allowing input acceptance of player side setting switch, and player side setting It is the figure which showed the period when a switch is lighted. When the confirmation operation execution period is longer than normal, the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means, the period during which input acceptance of the player side setting switch is prohibited, the period during which the player side setting switch is turned off, and the player side setting It is the figure which showed the period which permits the input reception of a switch, and the period which makes a player side setting switch light. Confirmation operation execution period of movable means, period for prohibiting input acceptance of player side setting switch, period for turning off player side setting switch, period for allowing input acceptance of player side setting switch, and player side setting It is the figure which showed the period when a switch is lighted. It is a figure which shows the setting screen for adjusting a volume and a light quantity. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a player side setting switch lighting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a player side production | presentation setting process. (A) The figure which shows the setting screen for adjusting the sound volume in the modification 1, (B) The figure which shows the setting screen for adjusting the sound volume in the modification 2, (C) The switch for production to the transition to a setting screen It is the figure which showed the modification 3 which displays operation description on a screen when using.

[Embodiment 1]
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are each composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes), etc. A special symbol (also referred to as “special figure”), which is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be identified, is displayed variably (variably displayed). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do.

  The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. For example, it is only necessary that a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the ones to be turned on and the ones to be turned off are differently set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  A main image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. In addition, four sub image display devices 5 a, 5 b, 5 c, and 5 d are provided at the four corners on the upper surface side of the main image display device 5. The sub image display devices 5a to 5d are display devices having the same shape. In the present embodiment, the display area of the main image display device 5 is wider than the display areas of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. The main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and form display areas for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the main image display device 5, it corresponds to the variable display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special figure game. Thus, for example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display portions such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game. Further, the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are respectively movable, and an image is appropriately displayed on the screen.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas are arranged on the screen of the main image display device 5. And in response to the start of one of the changes in the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game, In each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas, variation of decorative symbols (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started. Thereafter, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol is displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas in the main image display device 5. The fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result is stopped and displayed. Note that the confirmed decorative design may be different from the decorative design displayed during variable display. For example, a decorative pattern other than the scrolled decorative pattern may be a confirmed decorative pattern.

  On the screen of the main image display device 5, a special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or a special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B and Synchronously, a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be distinguished from each other are variably displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). Note that, for example, various display symbols such as special symbols and decorative symbols are derived and displayed by stopping display of identification information such as decorative symbols (also referred to as complete stop display or final stop display) and terminating variable display. is there. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be stopped and displayed, and for example, a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction may occur. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed deterministically, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbols completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  On the screen of the main image display device 5, a start winning storage display area 5H is arranged. In the start winning memory display area 5H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number corresponding to the special figure game (special figure hold memory number) is specified. Here, the variable display suspension corresponding to the special figure game is such that the game ball enters the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Generated based on the start winning by passing. That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done. In this embodiment, the on-hold storage display is performed by displaying the same number of symbols as in the variable display that is on hold (in this embodiment, such as a circle, hereinafter also referred to as a hold display symbol). One hold display symbol corresponds to one variable display held. The held variable display corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is represented by the hold display pattern displayed in the left area toward the start winning memory display area 5H. The held variable display corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is represented by the hold display symbol displayed in the right region toward the start winning memory display area 5H.

  For example, the start condition of the special figure game (first start condition) using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is established by the occurrence of the first start prize where the game ball enters the first start prize opening. If the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not established, the first special figure holding memory number is incremented by one (increment) And the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, when a second start prize is entered in which a game ball enters the second start prize opening, a special figure game start condition (second start condition) using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is established. If the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second special figure holding memory number is incremented by one (increment) And the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first special figure holding memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. Is started, the second special figure reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decremented).

  The variable display hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also referred to as a total hold memory number. The term “special figure hold memory number” simply refers to a concept that includes all of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. For example, it may indicate a concept including the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excluding the total reserved memory number.

  In addition to the start winning memory display area 5H, or in place of the start winning memory display area 5H, a display for displaying the number of reserved special figure memories may be provided. In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning memory display area 5H, a first hold for displaying the number of special figure hold memories in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The number of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B is, for example, the number corresponding to the upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number. (For example, four) LED is comprised. Here, the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number are displayed according to the number of lighted LEDs.

  A movable effect member 60 is provided in the vicinity of the predetermined edge in the display area of the main image display device 5 (here, in the vicinity of the right side). The movable effect member 60 is tilted toward the left side of FIG. 1 with the lower end portion as a fulcrum on the main image display device 5 side by the rotational drive of the motor 61 for the movable effect member shown in FIG. 2, and the upper end portion is the main image display device. 5. A production model (production equipment device for production) that advances to the front of the display area in FIG. That is, the movable effect member 60 can be changed between a non-tilting state extending in the vertical direction and the above-described tilting state by rotational driving of the movable effect member motor 61 shown in FIG.

  Below the main image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed between a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. (Ordinary electric accessory) is provided and a second start winning opening is formed.

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the gaming ball does not enter the second start winning opening. To. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the on state, so that the game ball can enter the second start winning opening. Put it in a state. Note that the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is normally opened when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, and the game ball can enter the second start winning opening, while the expanded opening state when the solenoid 81 is in the on state. However, it may be configured so that the game ball is difficult to enter. As described above, the normal variable winning ball device 6B has the first variable state such as the open state or the expanded open state where the game ball can enter the second start winning port, the closed state where the game ball cannot enter, or the difficult entry. It is configured to be able to change to a second variable state such as a normally open state. The first variable state may be a state in which the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening as compared with the second variable state.

  The game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (prize game media) based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 22A, and the first reserved memory number is a predetermined upper limit. If it is less than a value (for example, “4”), the first start condition is satisfied. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 22B, and the second reserved memory number is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value. The second start condition is satisfied.

  The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be one that directly pays out game balls that are prize balls, or may be one that gives a score corresponding to the number of game balls that are prize balls.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. As a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening and the game ball enters (passes) into the big winning opening. become unable. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the big prize opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special prize opening. Become. In this way, the special winning opening as the specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball can easily enter and is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter and is disadvantageous for the player. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot enter the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball is difficult to enter the big prize opening may be provided.

  The game ball that has entered the big prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Thus, when the game ball enters the large winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, for example, the gaming ball has entered another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls are paid out than usual. Therefore, if the special prize winning ball device 7 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special prize winning opening, which is a first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the special prize winning port and obtain a prize ball, which is disadvantageous for the player. There are two states.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. An ordinary symbol (also called “ordinary diagram” or “ordinary diagram”) that is identification information is displayed variably (variably displayed). Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, there is a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member. It may be provided. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as prize balls based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. . In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. . At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). It has been. The stick controller 31A includes an operation stick that the player holds, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). ing. The trigger button is operated in a predetermined direction by, for example, performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, a left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised so that. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod.

  A controller sensor unit 35 </ b> A (see FIG. 2) including a tilt direction sensor unit for detecting a tilt operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided in the lower pan body inside the stick controller 31 </ b> A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation pole when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing and the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). 31B (refer FIG. 2) is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 35 </ b> B that detects the player's operation act on the push button 31 </ b> B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31 </ b> B.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, and a signal separation board 220 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and a touch sensor board are arranged on the back of the game board or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to perform the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as control of variable display of the figure, or control of normal symbol variable display by the normal symbol display 20 by turning on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20 It also has a function to control.

  On the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like are mounted. The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (detection signals indicating that a game medium has been passed or entered) from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100. The solenoid circuit 111 uses a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for driving each solenoid, such as a signal for turning the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82 on or off) for a normal electric accessory. And the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the main image display device 5 and the sub image display. Various circuits for controlling the production operation by the electrical components for production such as the devices 5a to 5d, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 includes all or part of the display operation in the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d and the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, the decoration LED, and the like. A function for determining the control content for causing the electrical component for effect to execute a predetermined effect operation, such as all or part of the lighting / extinguishing operation in, and controlling the determined control content is provided.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12, game effect lamps 9, decoration LEDs, etc. A lamp driver circuit that performs on / off driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22 </ b> A and second start port switch 22 </ b> B), and a count switch 23 are transmitted to the main board 11. Wiring is connected. In addition, various switches should just have arbitrary structures which can detect the game ball | bowl as game media like what is called a sensor, for example. Further, the main board 11 is connected with wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control, such as the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electrical signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d and an audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice control command used, and the lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED may be included.

  FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100. The command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of an effect symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to variable display of the special symbol (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). ). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the variation patterns that can be used, which will be described later, there are variation pattern commands corresponding to the variation patterns specified by the numbers. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 120 controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type. The effect control microcomputer 120 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H), so the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands. The command 8C01 (H) (display result 1 designation command) designates a deviation. Command 8C02 (H) (display result 2 designation command) designates 15R jackpot. Command 8C03 (H) (display result 3 designation command) designates a small hit.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or to start variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the effect symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 120 ends the variable display (variation display) of the effect symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (at the time of initial setting). Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed (initial setting at the time of resumption). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a power failure recovery designation command when data is stored in the backup RAM, and otherwise, the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized. Send a command to specify. Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) that designates the start of fanfare (start of big hit gaming state) in the case of 15 rounds of big hit.

  In the big hit game state, the fanfare is executed first, and then the special big prize ball device 7 which is the big prize opening is opened (round game etc.), the main big hit game is executed, and the big hit game is executed. The ending is executed after the game. The fanfare is an effect that notifies or suggests that the jackpot gaming state has started, that is, that the jackpot gaming will start. The ending is an effect of notifying that the big hit game state has ended, that is, that the big hit game has ended.

  In the small hit game state, the main small hit game in the small hit game state in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened is executed, and the small hit ending is executed after the small hit game. The small hit ending is an effect that notifies the end of the small hit game state, that is, the end of the small hit game.

  Command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (small hit start specifying command) that specifies the type of small hit and specifies the start of the small hit gaming state. In the case of the first small hit, a small hit start designation command in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data is transmitted. In the case of the second small hit, the small hit in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. A hit start specifying command is transmitted. In the case of the third small hit, a small hit start specifying command in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data is transmitted. In the case of the fourth small hit, “04” is set in the EXT data. The small hitting start designation command in which (H) is set is transmitted.

  The command A2XX (H) is an effect control command (specifying command for opening a special prize opening) that designates opening of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A3XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big prize opening) that designates closing of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  Command A 601 (H) is an effect control command (a jackpot end 1 designation command: an ending 1 designation command) that designates the start of ending and specifies that the short time (advantageous) state after the big hit is the first advantageous state. is there. Command A 602 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end 2 designation command: ending 2 designation command) that designates the start of ending and specifies that the short time (advantageous) state after the big hit is the second advantageous state. is there. Command A 603 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end specifying command) that specifies the start of the small hit ending.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) that designates that the gaming state is the normal state (normal gaming state). Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (time-short state designation command) for designating that the gaming state is a time-short (advantageous) state. The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (time reduction number designation command) for designating the remaining number of times of the time reduction (advantageous) state (how many times the time reduction state continues until the variable display is finished). “XX” in the command B1XX (H) indicates the remaining number of time-saving (advantageous) states. Command C0XX (H) is an effect control command (pending storage number designation command) for designating the number of holding memories. “XX” in the command C0XX (H) indicates the number of reserved memories.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control microcomputer. Random Access Memory (RAM) 102 that provides a work area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform control operations, and updates numeric data that represents random numbers independently of the CPU 103 And a random number circuit 104 that performs an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  Note that the one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 only needs to incorporate the RAM 102 in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101, the random number circuit 104, the I / O 105, and the like may be externally attached.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, for example, the random number circuit 104 or the like counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The random number used for controlling the progress of the game is also called a game random number. The game random number may be updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 104 or may be updated by software when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined computer program. May be. For example, the random counter provided in a predetermined area (game control counter setting unit or the like) of the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 or a random counter provided in an internal register separate from the RAM 102 indicates a predetermined random number value. The random number value may be updated by storing numerical data and the CPU 103 updating the stored value regularly or irregularly.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various selection data and table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 has table data constituting a plurality of command transmission tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11, and a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. The table data etc. which comprise are memorize | stored. In the RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100, various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are temporarily stored so as to be rewritable.

  The effect control board 12 includes the effect control unit 126 that executes processing for controlling the effect operation in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the control content of the display operation in the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. A display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining, etc., a random number circuit 124 that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control unit 126 provides an effect control CPU 120 that controls an effect operation by executing a control program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area (work area) for the effect control CPU 120. The RAM 122 is configured. For example, an SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) can be used as the RAM 122.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) 362, a main display system output unit MK, a sub display system output unit SK, and a CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 363. . Although not shown, the display control unit 123 may also include a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like. The VDP 362 may be a graphics processing unit (GPU), a graphics controller LSI (GCL), or a microprocessor for image processing, more commonly referred to as a DSP (Digital Signal Processor). The CGROM 363 may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. It is sufficient if it is configured using The VDP 362 may be a graphics processing unit (GPU), a graphics controller LSI (GCL), or a microprocessor for image processing, more commonly referred to as a DSP (Digital Signal Processor). The CGROM 363 may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. It is sufficient if it is configured using

  The VDP 362 transmits a main display system output unit MK that transmits an image data signal of a main image to be displayed on the main image display device 5, and an image data signal of an output image that will be described later displayed on each of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. It has two signal output lines with the sub display system output unit SK for transmission. Of these two signal output lines, the main display system output unit MK outputs the image data signal acquired from the VDP 362 to the liquid crystal control board 400 in the main image display device 5. The liquid crystal control board 400 is connected to the image display data including the gradation data of each pixel of the liquid crystal panel 401 based on the image data signal acquired from the VDP 362 via the main display system output unit MK, and the back of the liquid crystal panel 401. Backlight luminance data indicating luminance information of the arranged backlight (for example, LED) is generated and output to the display driver 402. The display driver 402 generates a voltage corresponding to the image display data acquired from the liquid crystal control board 400, applies a voltage to the liquid crystal molecules of the liquid crystal panel 401 to change the liquid crystal alignment, and also changes the backlight according to the backlight luminance data. Dimming the light brightness. As described above, the liquid crystal panel 401 partially transmits or blocks the light from the backlight to display an effect image or the like.

  Also connected to the sub display system output unit SK is a signal separation board 220 for separating and transmitting data signals for transmitting image data output from the sub display system output unit SK to the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. The liquid crystal control boards 400a to 400d in the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are connected via the signal separation board 220. Then, the data signals output from the VDP 362 via the liquid crystal control boards 400a to 400d are input to the display drivers 402a to 402d in the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, and the display drivers 402a to 402d are based on the data signals. The liquid crystal panels 401a to 401d are driven by 402d.

  Further, the signal separation substrate 220 includes an input side substrate 220a and an output side substrate 220b. The input side substrate 220a outputs the data signal of the sub display system output unit SK (one system) output from the sub display system output unit SK in the display control unit 123 to the output side substrate 220b. The output-side board 220b has a primary separation circuit 302 that separates the data signal from the input-side board 220a into two systems, and two systems of signals (one system each) separated and output by the primary separation circuit 302. 2 secondary separation circuits 304a and 304b, and the data signals of each system (each 1 system) separated and output by these secondary separation circuits 304a and 304b to the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. Each of the transmission circuits 306a to 306d for transmission is included.

  The VDP 362 transmits a data signal with a dot clock value of 40 MHz, and the main image display device 5 receives the data signal with the same dot clock value as the VDP 362 and a frequency of 40 MHz to receive an image. It is supposed to be displayed. On the other hand, each of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d receives a data signal having a dot clock value of a frequency of 10 MHz and displays an image. Therefore, a data signal having a dot clock value of 40 MHz output from the VDP 362 is converted into a data signal having a dot clock value of 10 MHz by the signal separation substrate 220 and output.

  Further, in this signal separation substrate 220, the data signal having a frequency of 40 MHz with a dot clock value output from the VDP 362 is converted into a data signal having a frequency of 20 MHz by the primary separation circuit 302, and further subjected to secondary separation. The circuits 304a and 304b convert the dot clock value into a data signal having a frequency of 10 MHz and output the data signal.

  Next, referring to FIG. 5, a reset signal (RESX) that is a signal for forcibly initializing (hardware reset) the display state of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d and the display drivers 402a to 402d. A transmission path of a display-on command that is a command (information) for permitting display will be described. FIG. 5 is a configuration diagram showing a connection state of the effect control board 12, the signal separation board 220, and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the effect control board 12, the signal separation board 220, and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are connected via signal line groups 131 and 132a to 132d (broken arrows) for transmitting a reset signal. ing. The effect control CPU 120 generates a reset signal that is a signal for forcibly initializing (hardware reset) the display state of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and displays the sub image. It transmits with respect to apparatus 5a-5d. For transmission of the reset signal, serial signal lines of the signal line groups 128, 129a to 129d are used as dedicated lines. The reset signal transmitted from the effect control CPU 120 is collectively transmitted to each of the display drivers 402a to 402d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d via the signal separation substrate 220. When a plurality of display devices are mounted as in the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, the control can be simplified as compared with the case where a reset signal is individually output to each of the plurality of display devices.

In this embodiment, synchronous serial communication using a serial signal line capable of transmitting and receiving a clock signal (a signal whose period can be specified according to the signal voltage) (sequential data in synchronization with the clock signal via the serial signal line) The bus (so-called serial bus) that is the path of the communication (send communication) is, for example, SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface), USB (Universal Serial Bus), RS-232 (Recommended Standard 232), RS-432, PCI, etc. Standards such as (Peripheral Component Interconnect) can be used.
In this embodiment, the clock signal is a signal in which the steady state voltage is a low state (LOW) voltage and a higher voltage than the steady state is a high state (HIGH) voltage. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a signal in which the steady state voltage is a high state (HIGH) voltage and a voltage lower than the steady state is a low state (LOW) voltage, or a voltage lower than a predetermined threshold is in a low state (LOW). ) And a voltage higher than a threshold value may be a signal in a high state (HIGH). In this embodiment, the clock signal is a signal in which both the high voltage state (HIGH) and the low voltage (LOW) are 0 V or more. For example, the low signal is 0 V and the high signal is 0 V. A signal that is high voltage, a high state is 0V and a low state is a signal that is lower than 0V, a voltage that is lower than 0V is low (LOW), and a voltage that is higher than 0V is high ( Or HIGH). In these cases, the potential difference between the high state (HIGH) and the low state (LOW) can be arbitrarily set.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the effect control board 12, the signal separation board 220, and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are controlled data such as CSX (Chip Select), SCL (Serial Clock), and SDI (Serial Data Input). (Command) Connected via signal line groups 131, 132a to 132d (broken arrows) including a plurality of signal lines for transmission. After transmitting the reset signal, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the VDP 362 to transmit a display-on command. Upon receiving the display-on-command transmission command from the effect control CPU 120, the VDP 362 generates and transmits a display-on command that permits display to the display drivers 402a to 402d of the sub-image display devices 5a to 5d. To do. Data signal lines of the signal line groups 131 and 132a to 132d are used for transmission of the display on command. The display-on command transmitted from the VDP 362 is transmitted to the display drivers 402a to 402d via the signal separation board 220 and the liquid crystal control boards 400a to 400d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, respectively. When a plurality of display devices are mounted like the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, the control can be simplified as compared with the case where a display-on command is individually output to each of the plurality of display devices. .

  FIG. 6 is a configuration diagram of the input-side board 220a in the signal separation board 220. As shown in FIG. 7, one end of electric circuits (signal lines) 230, 232, 234 and the like is connected to the connector 222 connected to the sub-system output unit SK on the input side board 220a. Further, an IC 224 is connected to the other end of the signal lines 230 and 232, and an IC 226 is connected to the other end of the signal line 234. Further, one end of signal lines 236, 238, 240, 242 is connected to the IC 224, and an IC 228 is connected to the other end of these signal lines 236, 238, 240, 242.

  A V-by-One (registered trademark) signal (+) that is a data signal is transmitted to the signal line 230, and a V-by-One signal (−) that is a data signal is transmitted to the signal line 232. . A bidirectional Zener diode 252 for noise suppression is connected between the signal line 230 and the ground (GND), and a bidirectional Zener diode 254 for noise suppression is connected between the signal line 232 and GND. ing. The bidirectional Zener diode 252 removes the noise when a voltage having an absolute value equal to or greater than a predetermined value is applied to the signal line 230 as noise. Similarly, in the bidirectional Zener diode 254, when a voltage having an absolute value equal to or greater than a predetermined value is applied to the signal line 232 as noise, current flows and the noise is removed.

  Further, a part of the signal line 230 passes through the cylindrical ferrite bead 256 for noise suppression, and a part of the signal line 232 passes through the cylindrical ferrite bead 258 for noise suppression. ing. When a current flows through the signal line 230, a magnetic flux is generated in the ferrite bead 256. Thereby, the ferrite bead 256 functions as an inductor and removes noise. Similarly, when a current flows through the signal line 232, a magnetic flux is generated in the ferrite bead 258. Thereby, the ferrite bead 258 functions as an inductor and removes noise.

  A power supply voltage signal (VDD) signal is transmitted to the signal line 234. A varistor 260 for noise suppression and a capacitor 262 are connected in parallel between the signal line 234 and GND. The varistor 260 has a low resistance value when a voltage having an absolute value equal to or greater than a predetermined value is applied to the signal line 234 as noise, and removes noise when current flows. When the voltage applied to the signal line 234 changes, the capacitor 262 removes noise that is an AC component when a current flows.

  A signal group for driving the liquid crystal panels 5a to 5d is transmitted to the signal lines 236 to 242. A signal group for driving the liquid crystal panels 5a to 5d is a dot clock signal (CLKOUT), a data enable signal (DE), a vertical synchronization signal (VSYNC), and a horizontal synchronization signal (HSYNC). A bidirectional Zener diode 264 for noise suppression is connected between the signal line 236 and GND, and a bidirectional Zener diode 266 for noise suppression is connected between the signal line 238 and GND. A noise-reducing bidirectional Zener diode 268 is connected between 240 and GND, and a noise-reducing bidirectional Zener diode 270 is connected between the signal line 242 and GND. The bidirectional Zener diodes 264 to 270 flow current when a voltage having an absolute value equal to or greater than a predetermined value is applied to the signal lines 236 to 242 connected thereto, respectively, and remove this noise.

  FIG. 7 is a configuration diagram of the output side substrate 220 b in the signal separation substrate 220. As shown in FIG. 7, signal lines 330 a, 330 b, 330 c, 330 d, and 334 are connected to the primary separation circuit 302. The signal line 330a branches into a signal line 331a and a signal line 332a in the primary separation circuit 302, the signal line 331a is connected to the IC 324a in the secondary separation circuit 304a, and the signal line 332a is in the secondary separation circuit 403b. Connected to the IC 324b. The signal line 330b branches into a signal line 331b and a signal line 332b in the primary separation circuit 302, the signal line 331b is connected to the IC 324a in the secondary separation circuit 304a, and the signal line 332b is in the secondary separation circuit 403b. Connected to the IC 324b. The signal line 330c branches into a signal line 331c and a signal line 332c in the primary separation circuit 302, the signal line 331c is connected to the IC 324a in the secondary separation circuit 304a, and the signal line 332c is in the secondary separation circuit 403b. Connected to the IC 324b. The signal line 330d branches into a signal line 331d and a signal line 332d in the primary separation circuit 302, the signal line 331d is connected to the IC 324a in the secondary separation circuit 304a, and the signal line 332a is in the secondary separation circuit 403b. Connected to the IC 324b.

  The signal line 333a is connected between the IC 324a in the secondary separation circuit 304a and the connector 322a in the transmission circuit 306a, and the signal line 333b is connected between the IC 324a in the secondary separation circuit 304a and the connector 322b in the transmission circuit 306b. Connected by. The signal line 333c is connected between the IC 324b in the secondary separation circuit 304b and the connector 322c in the transmission circuit 306c, and the signal line 333d is connected between the IC 324b in the secondary separation circuit 304b and the connector 322d in the transmission circuit 306d. Connected by.

  The signal line 334 connected to the primary separation circuit 302 branches to signal lines 335a, 335b, 335c, and 335d. The signal line 335a is connected to the connector 322a in the transmission circuit 306a, the signal line 335b is connected to the connector 322b in the transmission circuit 306b, the signal line 335c is connected to the connector 322c in the transmission circuit 306c, and the signal line 335d is connected to the connector 322d in the transmission circuit 306d.

  The connector 322a is connected to a liquid crystal control board 400a in the sub image display device 5a via a harness 600 described later, and the connector 322b is connected to a liquid crystal control board 400b in the sub image display device 5b via a harness 600 described later. The connector 322c is connected to a liquid crystal control board 400c in the sub image display device 5c via a harness 600 described later, and the connector 322d is connected to a liquid crystal control board 400d in the sub image display device 5d via a harness 600 described later. It is connected to the.

  A reset signal (RESX) that is a signal for forcibly resetting after the image is drawn on the liquid crystal panels 401a to 401d is transmitted to the signal line 330a. In the primary separation circuit 302, a noise suppression capacitor 352 is connected between the signal line 330a and GND. When the voltage applied to the signal line 330a changes, the capacitor 352 removes noise that is an AC component when a current flows.

  In the transmission circuit 306a, a part of each of the four signal lines 333a passes through a cylindrical ferrite bead 354a for noise suppression, and a part of the signal line 335a is a cylindrical ferrite for noise suppression. The structure passes through the beads 356a. When a current flows through the four signal lines 333a, a magnetic flux is generated in the ferrite bead 354a. Thereby, the ferrite bead 354a functions as an inductor and removes noise. Similarly, when a current flows through the signal line 335a, a magnetic flux is generated in the ferrite bead 356a. Thereby, the ferrite bead 356a functions as an inductor and removes noise.

  The same applies to the transmission circuits 306b to 306d. That is, in the transmission circuit 306b, a part of each of the four signal lines 333b passes through a cylindrical ferrite bead 354b for noise suppression, and a part of the signal line 335b is a cylinder for noise suppression. The ferrite beads 356b pass through. When a current flows through the four signal lines 333b, a magnetic flux is generated in the ferrite bead 354b. Thereby, the ferrite bead 354b functions as an inductor and removes noise. Similarly, when a current flows through the signal line 335a, a magnetic flux is generated in the ferrite bead 356b. Thereby, the ferrite bead 356b functions as an inductor and removes noise.

  In the transmission circuit 306c, a part of each of the four signal lines 333c passes through a cylindrical ferrite bead 354c for noise suppression, and a part of the signal line 335c is a cylindrical ferrite for noise suppression. The structure passes through the beads 356c. When a current flows through the four signal lines 333c, a magnetic flux is generated in the ferrite bead 354c. Thereby, the ferrite bead 354c functions as an inductor and removes noise. Similarly, when a current flows through the signal line 335c, a magnetic flux is generated in the ferrite bead 356c. Thereby, the ferrite bead 356c functions as an inductor and removes noise.

  In the transmission circuit 306d, a part of each of the four signal lines 333d passes through a cylindrical ferrite bead 354d for noise suppression, and a part of the signal line 335d is a cylindrical ferrite for noise suppression. The structure passes through the beads 356d. When a current flows through the four signal lines 333d, a magnetic flux is generated in the ferrite bead 354d. Thereby, the ferrite bead 354d functions as an inductor and removes noise. Similarly, when a current flows through the signal line 335d, a magnetic flux is generated in the ferrite bead 356d. Thereby, the ferrite bead 356d functions as an inductor and removes noise.

  FIG. 8 is a configuration diagram of the liquid crystal control substrates 400a to 400d in the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. As shown in FIG. 8, the connector 402 is connected to transmission circuits 306a to 306d in the output side substrate 220b of the signal separation circuit 220 via a harness 600 described later.

  An IC 404 is connected to the connector 402 via a signal line. The connector 402 is connected to one end of signal lines 422, 424, 426 and the like. An IC 406 is connected to the other ends of the signal lines 424 and 426.

  A power supply voltage signal (VDD) signal is transmitted to the signal line 422. A varistor 460 for noise suppression and a capacitor 462 are connected in parallel between the signal line 422 and GND. The varistor 460 has a low resistance value when a voltage having an absolute value equal to or larger than a predetermined value is applied to the signal line 422 as noise, and removes noise when current flows. When the voltage applied to the signal line 422 changes, the capacitor 462 flows a current and removes noise that is an AC component.

  A V-by-One signal (+) that is a data signal is transmitted to the signal line 424, and a V-by-One signal (−) that is a data signal is transmitted to the signal line 426. A bidirectional Zener diode 464 for noise suppression is connected between the signal line 424 and the ground (GND), and a bidirectional Zener diode 466 for noise suppression is connected between the signal line 426 and GND. ing. The bidirectional Zener diode 464 removes the noise when a voltage having an absolute value greater than or equal to a predetermined value is applied to the signal line 424 as noise. Similarly, in the bidirectional Zener diode 466, when a voltage having an absolute value equal to or greater than a predetermined value is applied to the signal line 426 as noise, current flows and the noise is removed.

  Further, a part of the signal line 424 passes through the cylindrical ferrite bead 468 for noise suppression, and a part of the signal line 470 passes through the cylindrical ferrite bead 470 for noise suppression. ing. When a current flows through the signal line 424, a magnetic flux is generated in the ferrite bead 468. Thereby, the ferrite bead 468 functions as an inductor and removes noise. Similarly, when a current flows through the signal line 426, a magnetic flux is generated in the ferrite bead 470. Thereby, the ferrite bead 470 functions as an inductor and removes noise.

  Further, a signal line 428 is connected to the IC 404. A reset signal (RESX) that is a signal for forcibly resetting after the image is drawn on the liquid crystal panels 401a to 401d is transmitted to the signal line 428. A noise suppressing capacitor 472 is connected between the signal line 428 and GND. When the voltage applied to the signal line 428 changes, the capacitor 472 flows a current and removes noise that is an AC component.

  In addition, four signal lines 430 are connected to the IC 406. A signal group for driving the liquid crystal panels 5a to 5d is transmitted to the four signal lines 430. A signal group for driving the liquid crystal panels 5a to 5d is a dot clock signal, a data enable signal (DE), a vertical synchronization signal (VSYNC), and a horizontal synchronization signal (HSYNC). A bidirectional Zener diode 474 for noise suppression is connected between each of the four signal lines 430 and GND. The bidirectional Zener diode 474 removes this noise when a voltage having an absolute value greater than or equal to a predetermined value is applied to the signal line 430 connected thereto as noise.

  FIG. 9 is a configuration diagram of a harness 600 that connects the connectors 322 a to 322 d and the connector 402. The harness 600 includes a connector 602 connected to any one of the connectors 322a to 322d, a connector 604 connected to the connector 402, signal lines 610, 612, 614 and the like connecting the connector 602 and the connector 604, and the like. The

  A V-by-One signal (+) that is a data signal is transmitted to the signal line 610, and a V-by-One signal (−) that is a data signal is transmitted to the signal line 612. The signal line 614 is a ground (GND) line. These signal lines 610, 612, and 614 have a stranded wire structure, and suppress noise generated in each of them. Note that noise countermeasures using ferrite beads, Zener diodes, or the like may be applied to the control data (command) transmission signal lines included in the signal line groups 131 and 132a to 132d described in FIG.

  Next, the structure of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d will be described. In the present embodiment, the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are provided with magnets for maintaining the contact state when the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are in contact with the other sub image display devices 5a to 5d by movement.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, areas (contactable areas) 651a, 651b, and 651c that can be in contact with the other sub image display apparatuses 5a to 5d are provided on the sides of the outer edge portions of the sub image display apparatuses 5a to 5d. , 651d. Two magnets 650a1 and 650a2 are arranged at both ends in the contactable region 651a. The magnet 650a1 has an S pole on the outside and an N pole on the inside, while the magnet 650a2 has an N pole on the outside and an S pole on the inside, and the magnetic poles are different from each other. Similarly, in the accessible region 651b, two magnets 650b1 and 650b2 are arranged at both ends, and the magnet 650b1 has an S pole on the outside and an N pole on the inside, while the magnet 650b2 has an N pole on the outside and an S on the inside. It is the pole. In the contactable area 651c, two magnets 650c1 and 650c2 are arranged at both ends. The magnet 650c1 has an S pole on the outside and an N pole on the inside, while the magnet 650c2 has an N pole on the outside and an S pole on the inside. ing. In the contactable region 651d, two magnets 650d1 and 650d2 are arranged at both ends. The magnet 650d1 has an S pole on the outside and an N pole on the inside, while the magnet 650d2 has an N pole on the outside and an S pole on the inside. ing.

  When the sub image display devices 5a to 5d shown in FIG. 10A are rotated by 180 °, the state shown in FIG. When the sub image display devices 5a to 5d shown in FIG. 10A and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d shown in FIG. 11A are compared, the arrangement of the magnetic poles is the same. Further, when the four sub image display devices 5a to 5d shown in FIGS. 10A and 11A are brought into contact with each other, the state shown in FIG. 12 is obtained, and the S pole of the magnet of one sub image display device 5a to 5d is obtained. Is opposed to the north pole of the magnets of the other sub image display devices 5a to 5d in contact, and the north pole of the magnet of the one sub image display device 5a to 5d is the contact of the other sub image display devices 5a to 5d. Opposite the south pole of the magnet. Thereby, the contact state with the other sub image display devices 5a to 5d in contact with the one sub image display device 5a to 5d is maintained. That is, when the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are brought into contact with each other by arranging the magnets of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d in common as shown in FIGS. 10 (A) and 11 (A). These contact states can be maintained.

  On the other hand, for example, when the arrangement of the magnetic poles is as shown in FIG. 10B, when the sub-image display device is rotated 180 °, the state shown in FIG. 11B is obtained and the arrangement of the magnetic poles changes. In this case, even if the four sub image display devices shown in FIGS. 10B and 11B are brought into contact with each other, the S pole of the magnet of one sub image display device is in contact with the other sub image display device in contact. The N pole of the magnet of one sub image display device does not face the N pole of the magnet and does not face the S pole of the magnets of the other sub image display devices 5a to 5d that are in contact with each other, so the contact state is not maintained.

  The magnets of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d may be arranged as shown in FIG. That is, regions (contactable regions) 651a, 651b, 651c, and 651d that can be in contact with the other sub image display devices 5a to 5d are formed on each side of the outer edge portions of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. A magnet 650a is disposed in the contactable area 651a. The magnet 650a is arranged so that the lower side is an N pole and the upper side is an S pole. Similarly, in the contactable region 651b, the magnet 650b is arranged so that the left side is an N pole and the right side is an S pole. In the contactable region 651c, the magnet 650c is arranged so that the upper side is an N pole and the lower side is an S pole. In the contactable region 651d, the magnet 650d is arranged so that the right side is the north pole and the left side is the south pole.

  When the sub image display devices 5a to 5d shown in FIG. 10C are rotated by 180 °, the state shown in FIG. When the sub image display devices 5a to 5d shown in FIG. 10C and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d shown in FIG. 11C are compared, the arrangement of the magnetic poles is the same. In this case, when the four sub image display devices 5a to 5d shown in FIGS. 10A and 11A are brought into contact with each other, the S poles of the magnets of the one sub image display devices 5a to 5d are in contact with the other sub image display devices 5a to 5d. The N pole of the magnet of one of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d is opposed to the S pole of the magnet of the other sub image display device 5a to 5d that is in contact. To do. Thereby, the contact state with the other sub image display devices 5a to 5d in contact with the one sub image display device 5a to 5d is maintained. That is, by arranging the magnets of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d in common as shown in FIGS. 10C and 11C, the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are brought into contact with each other. It becomes possible to maintain a contact state.

  In addition, a magnetic detection sensor (not shown) that detects an illegal act of guiding the game ball to the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the big winning opening or the like by the magnets arranged in the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. It is desirable to turn off the power of the magnetic detection sensor when moving the sub image display devices 5a to 5d so as not to malfunction.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13, a plurality of LEDs 90 are arranged as light emitting means at the respective edge portions 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. Nine LEDs of 90u1 to 90u9 and 90d1 to 90d9 are arranged on the upper side of each of the edges 55a to 55d, and seven LEDs of 90l1 to 90l7 are arranged on the left side and 90r1 to 90r7 are arranged on the right side. Has been placed. Each of the LEDs 90 arranged at each of the edge portions 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d is driven to be turned on / off by the control of the lamp control board 14 that has received a command or control data from the effect control CPU 120. The In addition, the number of LED arrange | positioned at each edge part 55a-55d of each sub image display apparatus 5a-5d, arrangement | positioning space | interval, etc. are not restricted to the example shown in FIG. 13, It is arbitrary.

  As shown in FIG. 13, LEDs 9011, 90r1, 90r7, and 9017 are arranged at the four corners of the edge portions 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. In this case, there is a possibility that light emitted from these LEDs diffuses to any of two orthogonal sides. Therefore, the LED 90 is arranged avoiding the four corners of the edge portions 55a to 55d, and further, the light emitted from the LED 90 arranged on each side is shielded from the four corners of the edge portions 55a to 55d so as not to leak to other sides. You may make it install a board.

  Again, referring back to FIG. As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 121, thereby executing the process of controlling the effect operation by the effect electrical component. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various variation data temporarily stored, the receiving control CPU 120 for receiving input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 to the outside of the effect control board 12 A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. The effect control board 12 has an effect as a signal for transmitting image data to the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5 a to 5 d and an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13. Wiring for transmitting a sound signal, wiring for transmitting an illumination signal as an information signal indicating lamp data, and the like are connected to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting from the push sensor 35B an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the user's operation action has been detected is also connected. Furthermore, wiring for transmitting a predetermined drive command signal to the motor drive circuit 16 for driving the movable effect member motor 61 for operating the movable effect member 60 is also connected to the effect control board 12. . In the present embodiment, the effect control board 12 and the motor drive circuit 16 are connected using serial signal lines similar to the signal line groups 128, 129a to 129d.

  In the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation in an updatable manner. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data configuring the determination table, pattern data configuring various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered. The effect control pattern includes, for example, effect control execution data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, sub image display device movement control data, etc.) associated with the effect control process timer determination value, Consists of process data including an exit code. The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 stores various data used for controlling the effect operation.

  The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 generates various commands. For example, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a movement control command to a motor drive circuit (not shown) mounted in the sub image display devices 5a to 5d in order to move the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. In response to this movement control command, the motor drive circuit drives a stepping motor (not shown) mounted on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d to move the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. In the present embodiment, the sub image display devices 5a to 5d include a first stepping motor for linearly moving the sub image display devices 5a to 5d from the four corners of the main image display device 5 to the center, and a sub image display. A second stepping motor for tilting (rotating) the devices 5a to 5d is mounted. In the present embodiment, the effect control board 12 and the motor drive circuit are connected using serial signal lines similar to the signal line groups 128, 129a to 129d.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines, for example, the contents to be displayed by the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, and outputs a display control command to the display control unit 123 according to the determination. . The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the control content of the display operation in the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120, and displays the image. Generate data. For example, the display control unit 123 determines the display timing of effect images to be displayed on the display screens of the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. Perform control to execute.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes, for example, an input port for capturing an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and an output for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12. Port. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a command (effect sound signal) transmitted to the sound control board 13, a command (electric decoration signal) transmitted to the lamp control board 14, and a motor drive circuit 16 are transmitted. Command (drive control signal), a command (drive control signal) transmitted to the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, and the like are output.

  With the above configuration, the effect control CPU 120 displays effect images in the display areas of the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5 a to 5 d via the display control unit 123. Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the speakers 8L and 8R via the sound control board 13 to output sound, or turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 and decoration LEDs via the lamp control board 14. Or display effect images in the display areas of the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d via the display control unit 123, move the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, or drive the motor. The movable effect member motor 61 is driven via the circuit 16 to move the movable effect member 60. In this way, various effects (reach effects, movable effect member effects, message effects in which the main image display device 5 displays a message image to the player, which is to be displayed by the main image display device 5, originally, are displayed. The sub image display devices 5a to 5d display a part of the sub image display effect, etc.).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined game using a game ball as a game medium is performed, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a predetermined hit ball is based on a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) performed by a player on a hitting operation handle installed on the lower right side of the front surface of the housing of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A game ball as a game medium is launched toward a game area by a launch motor provided in the launch device. When the game ball that has flowed down the game area enters the first start winning opening (first start area) formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A, the game ball is detected by the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. Thus, the first start condition is established. Thereafter, for example, a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, because the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state has ended. Be started.

  Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening (second start area) formed in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. The second start condition is satisfied. After that, for example, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied due to, for example, the end of the previous special game or the big hit game state, the special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is performed. Be started. However, when the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the normal open state or closed state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening.

  Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2, the normal symbol starting condition for executing the variable symbol display on the normal symbol display 20 is established. After that, for example, based on the fact that the general symbol start condition for starting variable symbol normal display, such as the end of the previous general symbol game, is satisfied, the general symbol game on the normal symbol display device 20 is started. . In this ordinary game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed regular symbol, the variable symbol display result of the regular symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. Corresponding to the fact that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per standard”, the opening control and the expansion opening control are performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. When a predetermined time elapses, closing control or normal opening control for returning to the vertical position is performed. Whether or not the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is set as “predetermined per symbol” as the predetermined specific display result is determined when the normal symbol game is started by the normal symbol display 20 or the like. Is determined (predetermined) before derivation display.

  When a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started or when a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started, a special game is started. Whether the variable display result of the symbol is a “big hit” as a predetermined specific display result or whether it is a “small hit” as a special display result different from the specific display result. It is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and the effect control command for designating the variable display result and the variation pattern is the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 shown in FIG. To the effect control board 12.

  After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed, a fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result is displayed. Derived and displayed. Corresponding to the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the “left”, “middle”, “right” arranged on the screen of the main image display device 5 In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, variable display of decorative symbols (effect symbols) different from the special symbols is performed. In the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, a fixed special that results in variable display of the special symbol When the symbol is derived and displayed, the main image display device 5 derives and displays a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol.

  When a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a variable symbol display result of the special symbol, the variable symbol display result (special symbol display result) becomes a “big jackpot” (specific display result), which gives a value advantageous to the player. The big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state is controlled. That is, whether or not the game state is controlled to the big hit gaming state corresponds to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, and is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. As a special symbol variable display result, when a small hit symbol different from the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result (special symbol display result) becomes “small hit” (special display result), which is different from the specific gaming state. It is controlled to a small hit gaming state as a special gaming state. As the special symbol variable display result, neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, and when the lost symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result (special symbol display result) is “lost”.

  For example, a special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” is a big hit symbol, a special symbol indicating the number “1” is a small bonus symbol, and a special symbol indicating a symbol “−” is used. Lost design. Each symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening is in an open state, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in a first state advantageous to the player. Then, in the predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 second) or the period until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls enter the grand prize opening and a winning ball is generated, A round game that is continuously released (also simply referred to as “round”) is executed. During periods other than the execution period of such round games, the big prize opening is closed, and it is difficult or impossible to generate a winning ball. When a game ball enters the big prize opening, the winning ball is detected by the count switch 23, and a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball for each detection. The round game in the big hit game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, “15”) is reached.

  When the special figure display result is “big hit”, the case where the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” is included. For example, as a result of variable display of a special symbol, when the big hit symbol indicating the number “3” is derived and displayed, the big hit type is “non-probable change”, and when the big hit symbol indicating the number “7” is derived and displayed, When the type is “probability change” and the big hit symbol indicating the number “5” is derived and displayed, the big hit type becomes “surprise”. When the jackpot type is “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is set to the first state (the big winning opening is in an open state) advantageous to the player as a round game in the big hit gaming state. A normal open round is executed in which the upper limit time to be set is a relatively long time (for example, 29 seconds). On the other hand, when the jackpot type is “surprise”, the upper limit time for the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to be in the first state (the big winning opening is open) as a round game in the big hit gaming state is relatively short. A short-term open round is executed, which is time (e.g., 0.1 seconds). The big hit game state in which the normal open round is executed is also referred to as a normal open big hit state or a first specific game state. The jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed is also referred to as a short-term opening jackpot state or a second specific gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state when the big hit type is “surprise”, the upper limit time for changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state advantageous to the player in the short-term open round (the big winning opening is opened by the big winning door) The upper limit of the period for setting the open state) is a second period (for example, 0.1 second) shorter than the first period in the normal open round. It should be noted that the same control as when the normal opening round is executed may be performed except that the opening period of the big prize opening is controlled to be the second period in the short-term opening round. Alternatively, when a short-term open round is executed, the number of round games executed is less than the first round number (eg, “15”) that is the number of executions of the normal open round (eg, “15”). 2 "). That is, the jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed is changed to the first state in which the game ball is likely to enter the big winning opening in each round game as compared to the jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed. May be at least one of the second period being shorter than the first period and the second round number being less than the first round number.

  When the short-term opening round is executed, a predetermined number (for example, 14 balls) of balls (prize balls) can be obtained if a game ball wins a big winning opening. However, due to the opening period of the big winning opening being the second period (for example, 0.1 second), there may be a big hit gaming state in which substantially no balls (prize balls) can be obtained.

  The first specific gaming state only needs to have a higher advantage for the player than the second specific gaming state, and the second specific gaming state has a lower advantage for the player than the first specific gaming state. If it is a thing, these aspects should just be an appropriate | suitable thing. The second specific gaming state may not be advantageous to the player.

  When a predetermined small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, the variable display result (special symbol display result) is “small hit” and is controlled to the small hit gaming state as the special gaming state. . In this small hit game state, similarly to the short-term open round, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 performs a variable winning operation in which the large winning opening is set to the open state and changed to the first state advantageous to the player. That is, in the small hit gaming state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state over the second period is repeatedly executed. After the small hit gaming state ends, it is only necessary to maintain the gaming state before the variable display result is “small hit”.

  After the big hit gaming state is finished, the probability that the variable display result will be “big hit” (hit probability) is controlled to be a positive change state that is higher than the normal state based on the fact that the predetermined probability change control condition is satisfied. There is. The probability change state is controlled so as to continue until a predetermined probability change end condition such as the start of the next big hit gaming state is satisfied. In addition, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the average variable display time may be controlled to a short state when it becomes shorter than the normal state. The time-short state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state, and for example, the average variable display time is different. The short-time state is controlled to continue until one of the short-time end conditions is established first, among the fact that a predetermined number of variable displays have been executed and the next big hit gaming state has been started. . Note that the probability change state is controlled to continue until one of the probability change end conditions is satisfied first, between a predetermined number of variable displays being executed and the next big hit gaming state being started. You may be made to do.

  As an example, when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the gaming state becomes a short-time state. On the other hand, after the big hit gaming state is ended when the big hit type is “probability change” or “surprise probability”, the gaming state becomes a time-short state and a probability change state. After the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state before the small hit gaming state continues. However, if the number of executions of the special figure game in the short time state has reached a predetermined number when the special figure game whose variable display result is “small hit” is executed, the short time state will be reached after the end of the small hit game state. May end and return to normal.

  In the short-time state, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the first variable state (open state or expanded open state) and the second variable state (in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball enters the second start winning opening more easily than the normal state. Closed or normally open). For example, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol change time (normal diagram change time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, or the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol in each normal symbol game is “general”. Tilt control time for controlling the tilt of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the probability of “per figure” is higher than that in the normal state, and the variable display result is “per figure”. By making the control longer than that in the normal state and increasing the number of tilts more than in the normal state, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is changed to the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode. Just do it. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. Thus, the control for changing the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B between the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode is referred to as high opening control (also referred to as “time-short control” or “high base control”). Is done. By controlling in such a short time state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened, and a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is achieved.

  For example, if high-open control is not performed and the variable display result is `` big hit '' and the big hit type is `` surprise '', the probability change control is performed after the big hit gaming state ends, but the probability change control is performed. The high opening control may not be performed without entering the state. In addition, when the game state before the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” is at least a time-short state and high open control is being performed, high open control is also performed after the end of the big hit game state. May be performed.

  Note that the time-short state in which the high opening control is performed is also referred to as “high base state”, “high base”, and the like, and the game state that is not the time-short state is also referred to as “low base state”, “low base”, or the like. The probability variation state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as “high probability state”, “high probability”, and the like, and the gaming state that is not the probability variation state is also referred to as “low probability state”, “low probability”, or the like. The game state when the probability change state and the time-short state are set are also referred to as “highly accurate and high base state”, “highly accurate and high base”, and the like. The gaming state when the state is in the short-time state without being in the probable change state is also referred to as “low probability high base state”, “low probability high base”, or the like. The gaming state when the probability change state is not the short-time state is also referred to as “highly accurate low base state”, “highly accurate low base”, or the like. The normal state that does not become either the short-time state or the probability variation state is also referred to as “low accuracy low base state”, “low accuracy low base”, or the like.

  The game balls used as game media in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the score recording information given corresponding to the number thereof have valuable value that can be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes according to the quantity, for example. I just need it. Alternatively, these game balls and score recording information may not be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes, but may have valuable value that can be used for a second game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In addition, the game value that can be given in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to paying out a game ball as a prize ball or giving a score. For example, the game value can be controlled to a big hit game state or a special game state such as a probable change state. The maximum number of round games that can be executed in the big hit gaming state becomes a first round number (for example, “15”) larger than the second round number (for example, “7”), The upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in step 1 is a first number (for example, “100”) that is larger than the second number (for example, “50”), and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is the second probability (for example, 1st probability higher than 1/50) (for example, 1/20), and the number of consecutive chunks, which is the number of times of repeated control in the big hit gaming state without being controlled in the normal state, is the second consecutive number of chunks ( For example, 5 ") first communication Chang number greater than (e.g., such as part or all of it to be" 10 "), it may include be a more favorable game situation for the player.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the main image display device 5, the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. And, in response to the start of any of the special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, the decorative symbol variable display is started. The period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R In the (variable display period), the decorative display variable display mode may be a predetermined reach mode.

  Here, the reach mode refers to a decorative design (“reach variation design” that has not been stopped yet when the decorative design stopped on the screen of the main image display device 5 forms a part of the jackpot combination. ")" Is a display mode in which the variation continues, or a display mode in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R). The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “middle”) that has not been stopped yet when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) constituting the predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. In the decorative pattern display area 5C, etc.), or in all or part of the display pattern in which the decorative pattern fluctuates, or in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” This is a display mode in which symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination.

  Corresponding to the reach mode, the decorative pattern fluctuation speed is reduced, or a character image (effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative pattern is displayed on the screen of the main image display device 5. By changing the display mode of the background image, playing back and displaying a moving image different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design. May be executed. Such effect operations such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the variation pattern of the decorative pattern are referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the main image display device 5, but also the display operation in the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting operation in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 are performed. (Flashing operation) or the like may be included in an operation mode different from the previous operation mode in the reach mode.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (effect modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the direction of each reach production, “big hit” (in this embodiment, the big hit type is “probable change” or “non-probable change”, but “big hit” including “surprise” (May also be referred to as “reliability” or “hit reliability”, “expectation” or “hit expectation”). That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed. In this embodiment, as an example, reach effects such as normal, battle A, battle B, and battle C are preset. The reach effects of battles A to C are reach effects in which a plurality of characters fight. Hereinafter, the reach production of battles A to C is referred to as battle reach A to C, and the normal reach production may be referred to as normal reach.

  Battle reach A to C are reach effects in which a plurality of characters fight. In the battle reach A to C, for example, battle battle characters A to C may be set to different production modes so that fighting characters are different. In battle reach A or B, when a predetermined character wins the battle, the variable display result is “big hit”, and when the predetermined character loses the battle, the variable display result is “lost”. When the battle reach C is executed, the battle reach A may be executed after the battle reach C is executed (the battle reach A may be developed). When the battle reach C is executed but the battle reach A is not developed (for example, when a predetermined character loses the battle), the variable display result is “lost”. On the other hand, when the game is developed to battle reach A (for example, when a predetermined character wins the battle), the variable display result may be a “hit”.

  Depending on which reach production is executed, the variable display result of the variable display may be “big hit” (in this embodiment, the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change”). Expectation level of jackpot) changes. For example, the big hit expectation is higher when the battle reach A or B is executed than when the normal reach is executed. Also, in the battle reach, when the battle reach A (including the case where the battle reach C is developed) is executed, the big hit expectation is higher than when the battle reach B is executed.

  The expectation degree of jackpot is, for example, (probability that the effect will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of being the jackpot) / {(the probability that the effect will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of being the big hit) + (other than the time of the big hit) (Probability that the effect is executed) × (probability of not winning the jackpot)} (when the big hit expectation is “1”, the variable display result is always “big hit”. Same for degree).

  When the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game, is “big hit”, a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived and displayed on the screen of the main image display device 5. . As an example, when the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the same on a predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” By deciding and displaying the decorative symbols all together, it is only necessary to derive and display the finalized decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “surprise”, a predetermined short-term opening chance is formed on a predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. When the decorative symbol to be displayed is stopped and displayed, a fixed decorative symbol that is a special display result may be derived and displayed. In addition, when the big hit type is “accuracy”, after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as “reach lose combination”) is derived and displayed. Sometimes. When the special figure display result is “small hit”, the decorative symbols constituting the short-term opening chance eyes are stopped and displayed, as in the case where the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. There is a case in which a confirmed decorative design that is a special display result is derived and displayed, or a fixed decorative design that is a predetermined reach combination may be derived and displayed.

  When the big hit type is “non-probable change”, a definite decorative symbol that is a non-probable big hit combination may be derived. For example, a symbol number that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the main image display device 5 is a fixed decorative symbol that is a non-probable big hit combination. Among the decorative patterns of “1” to “8”, any one of the decorative patterns whose design numbers are even numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “middle”, “ The display pattern 5L, 5C, 5R on the “right” may be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line, and may be a type of a confirmed decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination. In this way, the decorative symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” constituting the non-probable variation big hit combination are referred to as non-probable variation symbols (also referred to as “normal symbols”). .

  When the jackpot type is “probable variation”, a definite decorative symbol that is a non-probable variation big hit combination may be derived, or a definite decorative symbol that is a probable variation big hit combination may be derived. For example, the symbol number that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” ornament symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the main image display device 5 is the symbol number “1”. ”To“ 8 ”, any one of the decorative symbols having the odd numbers“ 1 ”,“ 3 ”,“ 5 ”,“ 7 ”is“ left ”,“ middle ”,“ right ” The decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line, and may be a type of a fixed decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination. In this way, the decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols.

  A re-lottery effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols in which the confirmed decorative symbol is a non-probabilistic big hit combination or a probabilistic big hit combination. In the re-drawing effect, after the decorative symbols that are the non-probable big hit combinations are temporarily displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the main image display device 5, for example, , “Left”, “Middle”, “Right” decorative symbols (probability variation symbols) that are changed again in a state where the same ornament symbols are aligned in the respective decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and become a probable variation jackpot combination. Then, any one of the decorative symbols (non-probable variable symbols) that become the non-probable large hit combination is stopped and displayed as a final decorative symbol (final stop display). Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the confirmed decoration that becomes the non-probable big hit combination after re-changing the temporarily stopped display decorative pattern A re-lottery selection effect for deriving and displaying symbols is performed. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the definite decoration that becomes the probable big hit combination after re-variation of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern A re-lottery winning effect that stops and displays a symbol may be executed, or a re-lottery winning effect may be executed.

  When the big hit type is “probable change”, the decorative symbol that is a non-probable variable big hit combination is displayed once during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the lottery effect is executed during the variable display, or the subsequent big hit gaming state A jackpot promotion promotion effect may be executed at the end of the middle or jackpot gaming state, and the start of control to be in a probable change state may be notified. The jackpot promotion effect is in the jackpot gaming state at the start of the jackpot gaming state, during the execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state, during the period from one of the rounds to the start of the next round in the jackpot gaming state Probability change notification is made as to whether or not to control to the probability change state in the period from the end of the final round to the start of the next variable display game. Note that a notification effect similar to the jackpot promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot promotion effect that is executed after the last round in the jackpot game state is particularly called “ending promotion effect”. These re-lottery effects and promotion effects during the big hit may not be executed, and the start of control to be in a probable change state may be notified.

  When the special figure display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is not the reach mode, and the decorative pattern constituting the predetermined non-reach combination is stopped and displayed. There are cases in which a definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, when the special figure display result is “losing”, the decorative symbols constituting a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as “reach lose combination”) are stopped and displayed after the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes the reach mode. As a result, a definite decorative symbol that is a non-specific display result may be derived and displayed.

  Next, main operations (actions) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described.

  In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process.

  When the CPU 103 executing such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt process includes, for example, a switch process, a main side error process, an information output process, a game random number update process, a special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process, and a command control process. A process for controlling the progress of the game is included.

  The switch processing is processing for determining the state of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110. The main-side error process is a process of performing an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and generating a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The information output process is, for example, a process of outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software.

  As an example, the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side include a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and a random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. It only has to be included (see FIG. 16). The random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is determined whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game is controlled as the big hit game state by setting the variable display result as the big hit, and the variable display result is set as the “small hit”. It is a random value used for determining whether to control to the small hit gaming state, and can take any value from “1” to “65535”. The random number MR2 for determining the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types such as “non-probable change”, “probable change”, or “surprise change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. This is a random value used for this purpose, and can take any value from “1” to “100”. The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance, and “1” to “251”. Can be any value.

  In the special symbol process included in the game control timer interrupt processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and displayed on the special symbol display device 4. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of operations and opening / closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in a predetermined procedure. In the normal symbol process, the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20 is controlled to change the normal symbol display or to set the tilting operation of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. It is a process that makes it possible.

  The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. As an example, in special symbol process processing and normal symbol process processing, transmission settings for control commands (such as effect control commands) are set for each command in advance in the command transmission table (ROM 101 in accordance with the effect control command to be transmitted). ) In the ROM 101 is designated (for example, the value of the storage address is stored in a transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 102), and the command control process is provided in the RAM 102. Corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer (for example, the value indicating the storage address in the ROM 101) or the like, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, the effect control board 12 Send production control command For example, after the control data is set in the output port, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the production control INT signal and the production control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time and then turned off. It is possible to transmit the effect control command (the effect control command set to be transmitted) based on the setting in the table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101.

  When the start winning determination process is started, the CPU 103 first determines the first start opening based on the detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. It is determined whether or not the switch 22A is on (step S201). When it is determined that the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes), the CPU 103 has a predetermined number of reserved special figures stored in the special figure game using the first special figure. It is determined whether or not the upper limit value (eg, “4”) is reached (step S202). The CPU 103 reads the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control counter setting unit), thereby obtaining the first special figure reserved memory number. What is necessary is just to specify. When it is determined that the first special figure reserved memory number is not the upper limit value (step S202; No), the CPU 103 is a stored value of a start port buffer provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102. The start port buffer value is set to “1” (step S203).

  When it is determined in step S201 that the first start port switch 22A is off (step S201; No), or in step S202, it is determined that the first special figure reservation storage number has reached the upper limit value. In the case (step S202; Yes), the CPU 103 performs the second start based on the detection signal from the second start opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. It is determined whether or not the mouth switch 22B is on (step S204). When it is determined that the second start port switch 22B is on (step S204; Yes), the CPU 103 has a predetermined number of second special figure hold memory, which is the number of reserved figures of the special figure game using the second special figure. It is determined whether or not the upper limit value (eg, “4”) is reached (step S205). The CPU 103 reads the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control counter setting unit), thereby obtaining the second special figure reserved memory number. What is necessary is just to specify. When it is determined in step S205 that the second special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value (step S205; No), the CPU 103 sets the start port buffer value to “2” (step S206). When it is determined that the second start port switch 22B is not on (step S204; No), or when it is determined that the second special figure reservation storage number is the upper limit value (step S205; Yes), the CPU 103 The start winning determination process is terminated.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S203 and S206, the CPU 103 updates the pending storage number count value corresponding to the starting port buffer value to be incremented by 1 (step S207). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 adds 1 to the first reserved memory number count value, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sets the second reserved memory number count value to 1. to add. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is increased by 1 (incremented) when the game ball enters the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. ) To be updated. The second reserved memory count value is incremented by 1 (incremented) when a game ball enters the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special figure is satisfied. ) To be updated. Subsequently, the CPU 103 updates the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control counter setting unit), to add 1 (step S208). ).

  After executing the process of step S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (step S209). The CPU 103 determines a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a jackpot type determination from numerical data updated by a random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting unit) of the random number circuit 104 or the RAM 102. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted. The CPU 103 stores the extracted numerical data indicating each random number value as the hold data by setting it at the head of the empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S210). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is “2”, the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit shown in FIG.

  The first special figure storage unit shown in FIG. 17A has entered the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and a first start winning has occurred, but has not yet started. On-hold data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure hold storage unit associates a hold number with the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and based on the establishment of the first start condition by the entry of the game ball The CPU 103 stores the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the like as the reserved data. Is stored until reaching a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). As described above, the hold data stored in the first special figure holding storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable in this special figure game. Whether or not it is decided to control the jackpot gaming state based on the display result (special drawing display result), whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, reach reach of battle reach), etc. This is stored information that can be determined.

  The second special figure storage unit shown in FIG. 17B has been started, although the game ball has entered the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the second start winning has occurred. The reserved data of the special game (not shown special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates a holding number with the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second start winning opening, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the entry of the game ball The CPU 103 extracts the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the like, as the reserved data. This is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) is reached. As described above, the hold data stored in the second special figure holding storage unit indicates that execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the second special figure is being held, and the variable in this special figure game. Whether or not it is decided to control the jackpot gaming state based on the display result (special drawing display result), whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, reach reach of battle reach), etc. This is stored information that can be determined.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S210, the CPU 103 performs transmission setting of a start port winning designation command and a hold number storage notification command according to the start port buffer value (step S211). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 executes the first special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4 </ b> A on the effect control board 12. Settings are made to transmit a first start opening winning designation command which is an effect control command for notifying that the start condition has been established. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 executes a special game using the second special graphic by the second special symbol display device 4B on the effect control board 12. Is set to transmit a second start slot winning designation command which is an effect control command for notifying that the second start condition is established. Further, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 notifies the effect control board 12 of the first special figure reserved memory number (which may be specified from the first reserved memory number count value or the like). Setting for transmitting the first pending storage number notification command to be performed. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 determines the second special figure reserved memory number (the second reserved memory number count value or the like) for the effect control board 12. Is set to transmit the second pending storage number notification command. The start opening prize designation command and the reserved memory number notification command set in this way are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  Thereafter, the CPU 103 determines whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S212). When it is determined that the starting port buffer value is “2” (step S212; “2”), the CPU 103 clears the starting port buffer and initializes the stored value to “0” (step S213). Then, the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the starting port buffer value is “1” (step S212; “1”), the CPU 103 clears the starting port buffer and initializes the stored value to “0”. (Step S214), the process proceeds to step S204. Thereby, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect the start winning of the game balls that are effective at the same time, the processing based on the detection of both effective start winnings is surely completed. Can do.

  The first reserved memory number notification command here is the effect control board 12 as effect control information for notifying the increase of the first special figure reserved memory number when the first start condition is established by the occurrence of the first start winning. Sent to the other side. In addition, the second reserved memory number notification command is used as effect control information for notifying the increase in the second special figure reserved memory number when the second start condition is established by the occurrence of the second start winning prize. Sent to the side. Here, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command notify which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has entered and the start winning has occurred. At the same time, it is transmitted as hold notification information for designating which of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number has increased.

  The first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command correspond to the case where the execution of the special game is started when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. May be transmitted. Alternatively, when the reserved memory number increases, the reserved memory number addition designation command (first reserved memory number addition) is an effect control command indicating that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has increased. An effect control command indicating that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has decreased when the reserved memory number has decreased while the specified command or the second reserved memory number addition designation command has been transmitted. A reserved storage number subtraction designation command (a first reserved storage number subtraction designation command or a second pending storage number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  Instead of the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, or together with the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, it is an effect control command for notifying the total reserved memory number. A total pending storage number notification command may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number may be used.

  After executing the start winning determination process at step S101 shown in FIG. Select one of the processes to execute.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the first special symbol display unit 4A, the second special symbol reservation storage unit, the second special figure reservation storage unit, and the like are stored on the basis of the presence or absence of reserved data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. It is determined whether or not the special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B. In the special symbol normal process, whether or not the variable symbol display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” or “small hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. At this time, if the variable display result is determined to be “big hit”, the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. The data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type is stored in the jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, the game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102, whereby the jackpot type is stored. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol or the like in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B). Either a small hit symbol or a lost symbol) is set. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process (step S110) shown in FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure holding storage number is “0” (step S231). The second special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. The CPU 103 only has to read the second reserved storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When it is determined that the second special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” (step S231; No), for example, the CPU 103 corresponds to the head area (for example, the reservation number “1”) of the second special figure reservation storage unit. Numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is read out as reserved data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (step S232). Thereby, the game random number extracted in response to the occurrence of the start winning (second start winning) at the second start winning opening in the process of step S209 shown in FIG. 15 is read. The read numerical data may be stored in, for example, a fluctuation random number buffer or the like and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the process of step S232, the CPU 103 updates the second special figure reserved memory number to be decremented by 1, for example, by subtracting and updating the second reserved memory number count value by 1, and the second The contents stored in the special figure storage unit are shifted (step S233). For example, the CPU 103 stores one entry of the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” (the storage area corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) in the second special figure hold storage unit. Shift to the top one by one. Further, the CPU 103 updates the total reserved memory number (total reserved memory number count value) by one. Then, the CPU 103 updates the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, the game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102, to “2” (step S234). .

  When it is determined in the process of step S231 that the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S231; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0”. (Step S235). The first special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The CPU 103 only has to read the first reserved storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”. As described above, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in the process of step S231 that the second special figure reserved memory number is “0”, and the first special figure reserved memory number is “0”. It is determined whether or not. Thereby, execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure.

  If the special game is executed in the order in which the game balls enter the start winning opening regardless of whether it is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the first starting winning opening And the starting opening data indicating which game ball has entered into the second starting winning opening is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 in association with the holding number together with the holding data or separately from the holding data, What is necessary is just to be able to specify the order in which starting conditions were satisfied about the special figure game corresponding to each holding data.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S236, the CPU 103 updates the first special figure reserved memory number to be decremented by 1, for example by subtracting and updating the first reserved memory number count value by 1, and the first The contents stored in the special figure storage unit are shifted (step S237). For example, the CPU 103 stores one entry of the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” (the storage area corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) in the first special figure hold storage unit. Shift to the top one by one. Further, the CPU 103 updates the total reserved memory number (total reserved memory number count value) by one. Then, the CPU 103 updates the variable special figure designation buffer value to “1” (step S238).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S234 and S238, the CPU 103 determines the special figure display result, which is the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, as one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”. (Step S239). The CPU 103 selects, for example, a special figure display result determination table prepared in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 and sets it as a use table for determining the special figure display result. In the special figure display result determination table, as shown in FIG. 19A, the numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result indicates the special figure display result as “big hit” and “small”. It is only necessary to assign to the determination result of “win” or “losing” depending on the presence or absence of probability variation control in the probability variation state (whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state). The CPU 103 reads the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result included in the gaming random number temporarily stored in the variation random number buffer in step S232 or S236 from the variation random number buffer, and the gaming state is in the probabilistic state. By referring to the special figure display result determination table set in the use table based on whether or not there is and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1, depending on whether or not the gaming state is a probable change state Any determination result of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing” assigned to the determined value corresponding to the numerical value MR1 may be determined as the special figure display result. When the probability variation flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102 is in the on state, the CPU 103 is performing probability variation control. What is necessary is just to judge. For example, when the random value MR1 is “9000”, the CPU 103 determines that the special figure display result is “big hit” when the probability variation flag is on (when probability variation control is present), and the probability variation flag is If it is in the off state (when there is no probability variation control), it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost”.

  As shown in FIG. 19A, when the probability variation control is performed in the probability variation state, the special figure display result is “a higher rate than when the probability variation control is not performed in the normal state or the time-short state. "Big hit" is decided. Therefore, for example, based on the jackpot end process in step S117 shown in FIG. 14 (described later in detail), the probability variation flag is set to the on state corresponding to the case where the jackpot type is “probability variation”. When the gaming state is the probability variation state where probability variation control is performed, the special figure display result is more likely to be a big hit game state than when the probability variation control is not performed in the normal state or the short time state Cheap.

  Thereafter, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined by the process of step S239 is “big hit” (step S240). When it is determined that the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” (step S240; Yes), the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102 to an on state. (Step S241).

  In addition, the CPU 103 determines the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (step S242). The CPU 103 selects a jackpot type determination table prepared by, for example, storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance, and sets it in a use table for determining the jackpot type. In the jackpot type determination table, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is whether the current special figure game (variable display) uses the first special figure or the second special figure. Depending on whether the random number value is read from the first special figure reservation storage unit or the second special figure reservation storage unit) If it is assigned to the decision result of “probability change”, “non-probability change”, “surprising accuracy”, or in the case of the second special figure, “probability change” or “non-accuracy change” Good (see FIG. 23B). The CPU 103 reads the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type included in the game random number temporarily stored in the random number buffer for variation in step S232 or S236 from the random number buffer for variation, and the special game of this time is the first Set in the usage table based on whether the special figure is used or the second special figure is used, and the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random number MR2 read from the random number buffer for variation. By referring to the determined jackpot type determination table, a random value is determined depending on whether the current special figure game (variable display) uses the first special figure or the second special figure. Any one of the jackpot types assigned to the decision value corresponding to MR2 may be selected. For example, if the random value MR2 is “75”, the CPU 103 determines whether the current special figure game uses the first special figure or the second special figure (for example, It is possible to determine whether the process of step S232 or S236 has been executed), and when the special figure game of this time uses the first special figure (when the process of step S232 is executed) Determines (selects) “surprise” as the big hit type, and if the current special figure game uses the second special figure (when the process of step S236 is executed), “probable change” Is determined (selected) as a jackpot type.

  In FIG. 19B, the determination ratio of the jackpot type varies depending on whether the fluctuation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. More specifically, when the variation special chart is the second special chart, the big hit type is not “surprising”. Further, the rate at which the big hit type is determined to be “probable change” is higher when the fluctuation special chart is the second special figure than when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure. As described above, the predetermined jackpot type may be determined at a different rate according to the special symbol variably displayed in the special game.

  When the gaming state is a short-time state, the high opening control is performed, so that the normally variable winning device 6B is placed in the first variable state (open state or enlarged state) in an advantageous opening mode in which the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening. The state may be changed between an open state) and a second variable state (closed state or normal open state). When such a high opening control is performed, if the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second start winning opening, the big hit type will be “surprise” By limiting so as not to be determined, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interests due to an extended game. Note that when the fluctuation special chart is the second special figure, the big hit type may be set to be less likely to be determined as “surprising” than when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure.

  After executing the process of step S242, the CPU 103 stores the jackpot type (step S243). The CPU 103 stores a jackpot type buffer setting value (for example, as shown in FIG. 23B) in a jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (for example, a game control buffer setting unit). In the case of “non-probability change”, “0”, in the case of “probability change” “1”, and in the case of “probability”, the value “2” is stored. .

  If it is determined in step S240 that the special figure display result is not “big hit” (step S240; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S244). ). When it is determined that the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S244; Yes), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102 to an ON state. (Step S245).

  When it is determined in the process of step S244 that the special figure display result is not “small hit” (step S244; No), or after performing any of the processes of steps S243 and S245, the CPU 103 performs special processing in the special figure game. A determined special symbol that is a variable display result of the symbol is determined (step S246). As an example, if it is determined in the processes of steps S240 and S244 that the special figure display result is not “big hit” or “small hit”, the CPU 103 determines a special symbol predetermined as a lost symbol as a confirmed special symbol. To do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S240 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the CPU 103 determines that the big hit type is determined in step S242 (according to the big hit type buffer setting value) Any one of the special symbols determined in advance as the jackpot symbol may be determined as the confirmed special symbol. If it is determined in the process of step S244 that the special symbol display result is “small hit”, the CPU 103 may determine a special symbol predetermined as the small bonus symbol as a confirmed special symbol.

  After executing the process of step S246, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to “1” (step S247), and ends the special symbol normal process. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” in the process of step S247, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the variation pattern setting process of step S111 shown in FIG. 14 is executed.

  If it is determined in the process of step S235 that the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (step S235; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a predetermined demonstration display setting (step S235). S248), the special symbol normal process is terminated. In this demonstration display setting, for example, the CPU 103 performs an effect control command (customer display command) for designating demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. It is determined whether or not the waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the CPU 103 ends the demonstration display setting as it is. On the other hand, if not transmitted, the CPU 103 completes the demonstration display setting after performing the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command. The effect control board 12 displays a demonstration screen when a customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 in FIG. 14 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process for determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a result of a prior decision as to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. ing. Since the variation pattern designates the content (variable display mode) of the variable display of the decorative design, the content of the variable display of the decorative design is determined by this determination. The variable display time for special symbols and decorative symbols is set in advance corresponding to the variation pattern. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process, the variable display time from the start of variable display of the special symbol to the deriving of the definite special symbol resulting in the variable display result is determined. In addition, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of determining whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach” when the variable display result is “losing”. Alternatively, in the variation pattern setting process, by determining the variation pattern when the variable display result is “losing” at a predetermined ratio, it may be determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach”. . Furthermore, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of performing setting for starting the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 4. When the variation pattern setting process is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process (step S111) of FIG. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 20, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). If it is determined that the big hit flag is ON (step S261; Yes), the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern corresponding to the big hit when the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S262).

  When it is determined in the process of step S261 that the big hit flag is off (step S261; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S263). If it is determined that the small hit flag is on (step S263; Yes), the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern corresponding to the small hit when the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S264). On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step S263; No), the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern corresponding to the time when the special figure display result is “lost” (step S265).

  FIG. 21 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases in which the variable display result (special drawing display result) is “losing”, the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” that does not become the reach mode and the reach mode is reached. In addition, the variable display result (special display result) is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change”, or the big hit type is “surprise” or variable. Corresponding to the case where the display result (special drawing display result) is “small hit”, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance.

  In this embodiment, as a variation pattern in which the variable display result is “losing” and “non-reach” is designated, variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-3 for normal time (non-short-time), and variation patterns for time-shortage PB1-1 to PB1-2 are prepared.

  Also, there are prepared variation patterns corresponding to the contents depending on whether the variable display result is “big hit” (“big hit” in which the big hit type is “probability change” or “non-probability change”) or “losing”. Specifically, a fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (for losing) and a fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (“big hit”) that specify execution of normal reach are prepared. In addition, a fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (for loss) and a fluctuation pattern PA3-2 ("big hit") that specify execution of battle reach A are prepared. Further, a fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (for loss) and a fluctuation pattern PA3-3 (“big hit”) that specify execution of battle reach B are prepared. Further, a fluctuation pattern PA2-5 (for loss) and a fluctuation pattern PA3-5 ("big hit") are prepared which specify that the battle reach C (rescue) is executed and then developed into battle reach A.

  Furthermore, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, and when the variable display result is “small hit”, the short-term opening chance is derived from non-reach. A variation pattern PC1-1 is designated to specify that the operation is to be performed. A variation pattern PC2-1 is prepared which specifies that normal reach is executed and a definite decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination is derived and displayed.

  In the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 20, for example, the big hit fluctuation pattern is determined using the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. As an example, in the big hit variation pattern determination table, depending on whether the big hit type is “non-probable change”, “probable change”, or “surprise change” (depending on the big hit type buffer setting value stored in the big hit type buffer) A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern.

  The CPU 103 refers to the jackpot variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random value MR3 read from the variation random number buffer and the jackpot type buffer setting value, so that the jackpot type is “ If the variation pattern assigned to the decision value corresponding to the random value MR3 is determined (selected) as the variation pattern used this time depending on whether it is “non-probability variation”, “probability variation”, or “surprising variation”. Good. For example, when the random value MR3 is “140”, the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern PA3-3 when the jackpot type buffer setting value is “0” or “1”, and the jackpot type buffer setting value is “2”. Sometimes the variation pattern PC2-1 is selected.

  In the process of step S264 shown in FIG. 20, for example, the variation pattern at the time of a small hit is determined using the small hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. In the small hit variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern for the common variation pattern when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. ) Is assigned. However, the assignment of the decision value to each variation pattern is different from the case where the jackpot type is “surprising”. Accordingly, there is a possibility that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” according to the variable display mode of the decorative pattern in the variation pattern and the production mode of reach production, and the probability change state is reached after the big hit gaming state ( (Expected expectations) can be varied.

  Of the variation patterns that can be determined when the big hit type is “surprise”, a variation pattern that is not determined when the variable display result is “small hit” may be included. . Alternatively, the variation pattern that can be determined when the variable display result is “small hit” may include a variation pattern that is not determined when the big hit type is “surprise”. . The CPU 103 is assigned to the decision value corresponding to the random number MR3 by referring to the small hit variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random value MR3 read from the variation random number buffer. What is necessary is just to determine (select) a fluctuation pattern as a fluctuation pattern used this time.

  In the process of step S265 shown in FIG. 20, a loss variation pattern prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the normal state and the case where the gaming state is the time reduction state and the time reduction control is performed. A variation pattern at the time of losing is determined using the determination table. For example, whether the time is short or not depends on whether or not a short time flag (a flag that is turned on when the time is short) provided in a predetermined area (for example, a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102 is on. If the time is not short (when the time flag is off), the loss variation pattern is determined using the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. On the other hand, during the time reduction (when the time reduction flag is in the ON state), the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined using the loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG.

  In each loss variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern in accordance with the total number of reserved memories. The total reserved memory number may be specified from, for example, the total reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter, the total value of the first reserved memory number count value and the second reserved memory number count value, or the like. .

  The CPU 103 determines whether the normal time and the short time are based on whether the time is short, based on the total pending storage count value and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern read from the random number buffer for variation. By referring to any of the loss variation pattern determination tables according to the case, when the total number of reserved memories is not in the shortage, “0” to “1”, “2” to “4”, “5” to “8” The change pattern assigned to the decision value corresponding to the random number MR3 according to which one of “0”, “1”, and “2” to “8” corresponds to which May be determined (selected) as the variation pattern used this time.

  For example, when the time reduction flag is on and the random number MR3 is “229”, the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern PA2-1 when the total reserved memory count value is “0” and counts the total reserved memory count When the value is “1”, the variation pattern PB1-1 is selected, and when the total reserved memory count value is any of “3” to “8”, the variation pattern PB1-2 is selected.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S262, S264, and S265 shown in FIG. 20, the CPU 103 sets a special figure change time that is a variable symbol display time (step S266). The special figure change time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the change of the special symbol in the special figure game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special display result) is derived and displayed. It is. As shown in FIG. 21, the special figure fluctuation time is determined in advance corresponding to a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. The CPU 103 can set the timing at which a special symbol or decorative symbol variable display result is derived by setting a special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the processes of steps S262, S264, and S265.

  Following the process of step S266, a special game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and a special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B are started. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start one of the special symbol games for which the condition is satisfied (step S267). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed. When the CPU 103 starts variable display using the first special figure, the CPU 103 controls the first hold indicator 25A to display the first special figure hold memory number subtracted by 1 from the first display. You may make it carry out to the hold | maintain indicator 25A (for example, reduce the number of lighting of LED by 1). When the CPU 103 starts variable display using the second special figure, the CPU 103 controls the second hold indicator 25B to display the second special figure hold memory number subtracted by one for the second display. You may make it carry out to the holding | maintenance indicator 25B (for example, reduce the number of lighting of LED by 1).

  After executing the process of step S267, the CPU 103 performs the command transmission setting at the start of the special symbol fluctuation (step S268). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sends a first variation start command, variation pattern command, variable display result notification command, first hold from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12. A transmission setting for sequentially transmitting the storage number notification command is performed. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sends a second variation start command, a variation pattern command, a variable display result notification command, and a second hold from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12. A transmission setting for sequentially transmitting the storage number notification command is performed. The set command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example, by executing the above-described command control process after the special symbol process process is completed.

  The first variation start command and the second variation start command use the variation start in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. This is an effect control command for designating the start of fluctuation in the special figure game. The variation pattern command is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the main image display device 5 in response to variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is an effect control command for designating a variation pattern (variation pattern selected in the processing of steps S262, S264, and S265) such as a decorative pattern. The variable display result notification command is a special symbol variable display result (“big hit”, “small hit”, “losing”, or what kind of big hit type based on the confirmed special symbol determined in step S246. Is an effect control command for designating. The first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are effect control commands for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number.

  After executing the process of step S268, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to “2” (step S269), and ends the variation pattern setting process. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” in the process of step S269, when the next timer interruption occurs, the special symbol variation process of step S112 shown in FIG. 14 is executed.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 of FIG. 14 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol variation process includes a process of changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, a process of measuring an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to change, and the like. It is included. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the special symbol variation is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The fixed special symbol (the fixed special symbol set in step S110), which is the variable display result of the symbol, is stopped (displayed), and when the symbol is stopped, the special symbol is stopped (displayed and displayed). The symbol determination command transmission setting, which is an effect control command for notifying the user, is also set, and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”. The symbol determination command that is set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example, by executing the above-described command control process after the special symbol process is completed. By repeatedly executing step S112, special symbol variable display, fixed special symbol derivation display, and the like are realized.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 in FIG. 14 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, a process for determining whether the big hit flag or the small hit flag is on, or when the big hit flag is on, the time reduction flag and the probability variation flag are turned off, and a predetermined area ( The count value of the short-time counter that counts the remaining number of variable displays executed during the short-time control provided in the game control counter setting unit or the like is set to “0”, and the big hit start production waiting time (in the big hit game state) (It is the waiting time until the execution of the production corresponding to the start is started, which is a predetermined time), and the start of the jackpot gaming state based on the fact that the special figure display result is “big hit” is designated This includes a process of performing transmission setting of the hit start designation command (production control command) and updating the special figure process flag to “4”.

  Further, in the special symbol stop process, when the big hit flag is in the off state and the hour / short flag is in the on state, the count value of the hour / times counter is decremented by “1”, and the count value after the decrement is “ When it is “0”, the time reduction flag is turned off to end the time reduction state, and when the small hit flag is in the on state, the small hit start production waiting time is set, and the special figure display result is “small”. Set the transmission of the hit start designation command (effect control command), which is a control command for designating the start of the small hit gaming state based on “winning”, update the special figure process flag to “8”, A process of updating the value of the special figure process flag to “0” when the flag and the small hit flag are not in the on state is included. Here, the effect waiting time at the start of the small hit is a waiting time until the execution of the effect corresponding to the start of the small hit gaming state is started, and is a predetermined time.

  The command set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example, by executing the above-described command control process after the special symbol process is completed.

  Through a series of these processes, the time reduction state and the probability change state are temporarily terminated at the time of a big hit, and the remaining variable display that can be executed during the time reduction is reduced by "once" at the time of a loss or a small hit. When the remaining variable display that can be executed during the time reduction becomes “0” times, the time reduction flag is turned off and the time reduction state is terminated. That is, the time reduction state (time reduction control) ends when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (the following initial count value) before the variable display result becomes “big hit” from the start. Further, when there is a change in the gaming state, notification of the changed gaming state is made to the effect control board 12 side.

  14 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In this big hit release pre-processing, the variable display result is “big hit” and the start timing of the round game (for example, the fact that the big hit start performance waiting time set above has elapsed) Based on the above, a process of starting the execution of the round game in the big hit game state and opening the big winning opening, a process of starting the measurement of the elapsed time from the open state, and the like are included. In this process, for example, corresponding to whether the jackpot type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” (which can be specified by the jackpot type buffer setting value stored in the jackpot type buffer), a big prize is awarded. You may make it set the upper limit of the period which makes a mouth open state. As an example, the normal opening round is executed by setting the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened to “29 seconds” corresponding to “non-probability change” or “probability change” for the big hit type. do it. On the other hand, the short-term opening round may be executed by setting the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is in the open state to “0.1 seconds” corresponding to the big hit type “surprise”. When the process for opening the special winning opening is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. By repeatedly performing step S114, waiting until the start timing of the round game, opening of the big prize opening, and the like are realized.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In the big hit opening process, the winning prize opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. For determining whether or not it is time to return the game from the open state to the closed state (or a partially open state), and the timing to return the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state (the number of the game balls Or the process of returning the winning prize opening to the closed state when it is determined that the predetermined number (for example, 9) or the elapsed time reaches the upper limit period set in step S114) , Processing for starting measurement of the elapsed time since returning to the closed state is included. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”. By repeatedly performing step S115, the open state of the special winning opening is maintained until the timing for returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. After the big hit opening process, a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round game in which the big winning opening is in an open state has reached a predetermined upper limit number, Processing to measure the elapsed time since returning to the closed state is included. When the next round game is started, for example, when the measured elapsed time is the time when the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4” (in this case) For example, in the process of step S114, the big winning opening is immediately opened), and when the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit number, A setting for transmitting a gaming state end command is performed, and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”. The command set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example, by executing the above-described command control process after the special symbol process is completed. By repeatedly performing step S116, waiting is performed until the special winning opening is again opened.

  By repeatedly executing steps S114 to S116, the big hit gaming state is realized.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The jackpot end process is a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a later-described ending effect is executed as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot gaming state (ending effect) waiting time at the end of the jackpot Processing for determining whether or not (time) has elapsed. If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed, the big hit end processing is ended as it is. When the big hit end waiting time has elapsed, if the big hit type is “non-probable change” according to the big hit type (big hit type buffer setting value) stored in the big hit type buffer (the big hit type buffer setting value is If it is “0”, the probability variation flag remains off and the hourly flag is turned on. If the jackpot type is “probability variation” or “surprise” (the jackpot type buffer setting value is “1” or “2”) ”), The probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are turned on. In this way, the game state after the end of the big hit gaming state when the big hit type is “non-probable change” is a low-accuracy high-base state with only short-time control, and the big hit type is “probable change” or “surprise” The gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state becomes a high-accuracy and high-base state with probability variation control and time-shortening control. Further, when the time reduction flag is turned on, a count initial value (for example, 100 times) is set in the time reduction number counter. When the big hit end production waiting time has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is finally updated to “0”.

  The time-short state (time-short control) ends only when the next jackpot gaming state is started out of a predetermined number of variable displays being executed and the next jackpot gaming state being started. Also good. In this case, it is not necessary to set the initial count value or the short-time count counter itself.

  14 is executed when the special process flag value is “8”. In this small hit opening pre-processing, the variable display result is “small hit”, and the timing for opening the big winning opening is set (for example, the small hit start start waiting time set above) And the like, and the process of starting the measurement of the elapsed time from the open state is included. In addition, in the small hit opening pre-processing, for example, as in the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.1 second”. ”Or the like is set to the small hit gaming state. When a process for opening the special winning opening is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”. By repeatedly performing step S118, waiting is performed until the special winning opening is opened.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. This small hit opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. Processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the mouth from the open state to the closed state (or may be partly open state), and timing to return the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state (the game ball The winning prize opening is returned to the closed state when it is determined that the number of the game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9) or the elapsed time reaches the upper limit period set in step S118. Processing is included. And when returning the grand prize opening to the closed state, a process for determining whether or not the number of times of opening has reached a predetermined upper limit number, or a timing when the grand prize opening is returned to the closed state when the upper limit number is not reached A process for measuring the elapsed time from the time, a process for opening the special winning opening again when the measured elapsed time reaches a preset time, and the like are executed. When the number of times of opening of the big winning opening reaches the upper limit number, a setting is made to transmit a small hit gaming state end command which is a control command for notifying that the small hit gaming state has ended, and the value of the special figure process flag is “ Updated to 10 ″. The command set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example, by executing the above-described command control process after the special symbol process is completed.

  Step S118 is repeatedly executed, and step S119 is repeatedly executed to realize the small hit gaming state.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. In the small hit end processing, an effect operation for informing the end of the small hit gaming state is performed by an effect device such as the main image display device 5, the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. For example, a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a given period elapses (ending the small hit end process until the waiting time elapses) is included. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the state of the probability change flag and the short time flag is not changed, and the gaming state before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is applied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process shown in FIG. When the effect control CPU 120 starts the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values. Circuit) is set (step S501). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a timer interrupt flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122 is on (step S502). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example, based on the CTC register setting. When it is determined that the timer interrupt flag is off (step S502; No), the effect control CPU 120 repeats the process of step S501.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is, for example, an interruption that occurs when an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption occurs due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disabled state is used, It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control CPU 120 takes in a control signal serving as an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control CPU 120 stores the fetched effect control command in, for example, an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  When it is determined that the timer interrupt flag is on (step S502; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 clears the timer interrupt flag and turns it off (step S503).

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 executes command analysis processing (step S504). In the command analysis processing, for example, the effect control CPU 120 reads various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, and then reads the effect control commands. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing (step S504). In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the contents of the effect control command stored in the command reception buffer. Specifically, the command is stored in the command reception buffer by detecting that the effect control INT signal output from the game control microcomputer 100 has risen, and by first executing interrupt processing, 1-byte MODE data is stored. Is received and stored in the command reception buffer. Next, after the effect control INT signal is turned off, it is detected that the next effect control INT signal has risen, and the 1-byte EXT data is captured by the interrupt process, and the next area of the command reception buffer Stored in Through such processing, one effect control command is fetched and stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S601). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When it is determined that the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S601; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S602). On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is not stored in the command receiving buffer (step S601; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the command analysis process.

  After executing the process of step S602, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S603). When it is determined that the received effect control command is a symbol determination designation command (step S603; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 ends the variable display of the decorative symbols on the main image display device 5 and derives and displays the display result. (Step S604). Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes display initialization command transmission processing (step S605). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag (step S606), and returns the process to step S601.

  Here, the display initialization command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG. In the display initialization command transmission processing, the display initialization command is divided and transmitted to the display drivers 402a to 402d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d via the VDP 362 from the effect control CPU 120. . Thereby, the display states of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d that are likely to generate noise due to static electricity due to position movement or the like can be initialized asynchronously with the main image display device 5. When the display initialization command transmission process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first sets the display initialization command transmission flag to ON (step S651). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value n of the display initialization command division transmission counter is smaller than the command division number N (for example, N = 8) (step S652). Here, the display initialization command division transmission counter is a counter for counting the number of division transmissions of the display initialization command. When it is determined that the value n of the display initialization command division transmission counter is smaller than the command division number N, that is, all the divided display initialization commands are not transmitted (step S652; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 The value n of the display initialization command division transmission counter is incremented by 1 (step S653), and the nth display initialization command is transmitted among the N display initialization commands (step S654). In consideration of the processing load after receiving the command in each of the display drivers 402a to 402d, the effect control CPU 120 performs an interval of a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds) from the transmission of the previous display initialization command. It is desirable to send a display initialization command. After executing the process of step S654, the effect control CPU 120 returns the process to step S652. That is, the processes in steps S652 to S654 are repeated until all the divided display initialization commands are transmitted.

  In the process of step S652, when it is determined that the value n of the display initialization command division transmission counter is equal to or greater than the command division number N, that is, all the divided display initialization commands have been transmitted (step S652; No), for effect control The CPU 120 clears the display initialization command transmission flag to turn it off (step S655), and clears the value of the display initialization command transmission counter to 0 (step S656). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the display initialization command transmission process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the display drive control main process executed by the display drivers 402a to 402d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d will be described. Here, the case where the display driver 402a of the sub image display device 5a executes the display drive control main process will be described as an example. However, the display drivers 402b to 402d of the sub image display devices 5b to 5d execute the display drive control main process. The same applies to the case. In place of the display drivers 402a to 402d, a processor such as a CPU of a control unit included in each of the liquid crystal control boards 400a to 400d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d performs the same processing as the processing shown in FIG. Also good.

  When the display drive control main process is started, the display driver 402a of the sub image display device 5a first determines whether or not a display initialization command has been received (step S661). If it is determined that the display initialization command has been received (step S661; Yes), the display driver 402a stores the received display initialization command in the command reception buffer (step S662). Subsequently, the display driver 402a determines whether or not all display initialization commands have been received (step S663). The display driver 402a may determine whether or not all display initialization commands have been received by comparing the value of the display initialization command reception number counter with the display initialization command division number. If it is determined that all display initialization commands have been received (step S663; Yes), the display driver 402a executes display initialization processing (step S664). In the display initialization process, initialization of the display state on the liquid crystal panel 401a by software control is executed while the power supply to the sub image display device 5a is maintained. Thereafter, the display driver 402a returns the process to step S661.

  If it is determined in step S661 that the display initialization command has not been received (step S661; No), the display driver 402a determines whether a reset signal has been received (step S665). When it is determined that the reset signal has been received (step S665; Yes), the display driver 402a performs a hardware reset (step S666). When the hardware reset is executed, the sub-image display device 5a is not equipped with a memory having a backup power supply. Therefore, the display driver 402a returns the display state of the liquid crystal panel 401a to the power-on state. For example, after clearing the RAM mounted on the sub-image display device 5a, a predetermined command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 and the VDP 362, and various setting parameters, image data, and the like are acquired, thereby displaying the liquid crystal panel 401a. Return the state to the initial state. When the initialization is completed, the display driver 402a transmits an initialization completion notification indicating that the initialization is completed to the effect control CPU 120 and the VDP 362. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reset signal has not been received (step S665; No), the display driver 402a executes other processing (step S667) and returns the processing to step S661. Note that after the display driver 402a determines that the reset signal has been received, the RAM mounted in the sub-image display device 5a is not cleared, and various setting parameters, image data, and the like are omitted, the backlight is turned off, and the liquid crystal is displayed. Only the initialization of the display state in the liquid crystal panel 401a, such as resetting the polarization state of the element, may be performed.

  Returning to the description of the command analysis process shown in FIG. 25, when it is determined in the process of step S603 that the received effect control command is not a symbol determination designation command (step S603; No), the effect control CPU 120 receives the received effect. It is determined whether or not the control command is a command after the special winning opening is opened (step S607). When it is determined that the received effect control command is a command after opening the big prize opening (step S607; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 causes the main image display device 5 to display a screen after the round opening (step S608). The effect control CPU 120 may display the post-round opening screen on the sub image display devices 5 a to 5 d instead of the main image display device 5 or in the same manner as the main image display device 5.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 executes display initialization command processing (step S609). The display initialization command process is executed according to the flowchart shown in FIG. 26, similar to the process in step S605. After executing the process of step S609, the effect control CPU 120 sets the post-release command reception flag (step S610), and returns the process to step S601.

  In the process of step S607, when it is determined that the received effect control command is not a command after opening the big prize opening (step S607; No), the effect control CPU 120 has the received effect control command as a customer waiting demonstration designation command. It is determined whether or not (step S611). When it is determined that the received effect control command is a customer waiting demonstration designation command (step S611; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays a demonstration movie on each display screen of the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. Is displayed (step S612).

In the process of step S612, after starting display of the demonstration movie on the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not dark display is executed on each display screen ( It is determined whether or not it is during the dark display period (step S613). Here, in the display of the demonstration movie, the display screens of the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are set to be in dark display (blackout screen) for the first period of about 1 second. Yes. The dark display is a display in which the visibility of a predetermined image is changed to a difficult to view state lower than a reference state. For example, the entire display screen of the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d is black. Darken to a single color image. Therefore, after the demonstration movie is displayed for a predetermined time, the display screen is darkly displayed at the timing of switching to the display of the same or different demonstration movie. When it is determined that the dark display is not executed (step S613; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes other analysis processing (step S617).
In the present embodiment, the display of the demonstration movie after the dark display is executed is designed in advance so that switching from the dark display (blackout screen) is a moving image that does not feel strange.

  When it is determined that the dark display is being executed (step S613; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 transmits a reset signal that is a signal for hardware resetting the sub image display devices 5a to 5d (step S614). . Thus, by executing the hardware reset during the dark display, the blank screen accompanying the hardware reset can be hidden. In addition, the sub image display devices 5a to 5d that are likely to generate noise due to static electricity due to position movement or the like can be hardware-reset asynchronously with the main image display device 5. Note that the hardware reset refers to restarting the entire sub image display device including each device mounted therein. In the present embodiment, an example will be described in which the display states of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are collectively initialized by collectively transmitting reset signals.

  Here, transmitting a reset signal means changing the signal level of the reset signal from a high level to a low level for a certain period, as shown in FIG. That is, during the period in which the reset signal is at a high level, an allowable signal that allows the display operation of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d is output, and the signal level of the reset signal is changed from a high level to a low level for a certain period. In the case of displacement, a reset signal for hardware resetting the sub image display devices 5a to 5d is output.

  Once the reset signal changes from the high level to the low level, as shown in FIG. 28C, the display operation of each of the liquid crystal panels 401a to 401d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d is stopped, and the backlight LED is turned on. , Power down state.

  In this way, the reset signal is output by setting one signal line as a dedicated line and setting the signal level to either high level or low level. There is an advantage that it is resistant to static electricity noise without a problem of a shift of a clock signal between paths.

  After performing the process of step S614, the CPU 120 for effect control executes a display on command transmission process (see FIG. 29 described later) for causing the VDP 362 to transmit a display on command (step S615). The effect control CPU 120 outputs a transmission command for instructing the VDP 362 to transmit a display-on command. The VDP 362 that has acquired this transmission command generates a display-on command for permitting display by the display drivers 402a to 402d, and prior to outputting the image data, the sub-image display devices 5a to 5 are connected via the signal separation board 220. It transmits to each display driver 402a-402d of 5d.

  When the display drivers 402a to 402d acquire the display-on command, the display drivers 402a to 402d start driving the liquid crystal panels 401a to 401d connected to the display drivers 402a to 402d, respectively, so that the liquid crystal panels 401a to 401d can be displayed. After that, when image data is input, the display drivers 402a to 402d perform control to display images based on the image data on the liquid crystal panels 401a to 401d. Thereby, the display control is started before the liquid crystal panels 401a to 401d can be displayed, thereby preventing a phenomenon that the progress of the game related to the image display is hindered.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 28B and 28C, the liquid crystal panel 401a by the display drivers 402a to 402d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d until the display on command is acquired after receiving the reset signal. The drive of .about.401d is stopped and the display is controlled to be impossible. When the display on command transmitted from the VDP 362 is acquired, the liquid crystal panels 401a to 401d are brought into a displayable state by the display drivers 402a to 402d. At this time, as shown in FIG. 28C, the display operation of the liquid crystal panels 401a to 401d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d is started, and the LEDs that are the backlights of the liquid crystal panels 401a to 401d are turned on. State (power-on state).

  Note that the VDP 362 may transmit a display off command for prohibiting display to the display drivers 402a to 402d. When this display off command is transmitted, the display drivers 402a to 402d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are transmitted. The driving of each of the liquid crystal panels 401a to 401d can be stopped, and the display of each of the liquid crystal panels 401a to 401d can be terminated. Since the liquid crystal panels 401a to 401d are controlled to be in a state in which display cannot be performed in advance by the display-off command, it is possible to prevent an unintentional display from being performed when the display is subsequently resumed and hindering the progress of the game related to image display. be able to.

  Next, returning to the description of the flowchart of the command analysis process shown in FIG. 25, the effect control CPU 120 sets the customer waiting demo command reception flag after executing the process of step S615 (customer waiting mode, step S617). The process returns to step S601.

  In the process of step S611, when it is determined that the received effect control command is not a customer waiting demonstration designation command (step S611; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes other analysis processes (step S618), and performs the process. It returns to step S601.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 29, the display on command transmission process executed in the initialization process (see step S501) of the effect control main process shown in FIG. 24 and the step S615 of the command analysis process will be described. When the display-on-command transmission process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first sets the serial communication clock frequency to the VDP 362 (a frequency based on a period that can be specified by the clock signal, that is, a frequency specified by the period of the clock signal). A specific frequency (for example, 795 kHz) is set (step S901), the timer is set for 1 second (predetermined period) (step S902), and whether or not the timer has timed out (timed up), that is, the clock frequency of serial communication It is determined whether or not one second has elapsed since setting the frequency to the specific frequency (step S903). When the timer has not timed out (step S903; No), the effect control CPU 120 repeats the process of step S903. When the timer has timed out (step S903; Yes), the serial control via the VDP 362 (signal line group 128, A display on command is transmitted (using serial signal lines 129a to 129d) (step S904).

  After transmitting the display-on command, the effect control CPU 120 lowers the serial communication clock frequency to a non-transmission frequency lower than the specific frequency (a frequency when the display-on command is not transmitted, for example, 500 kHz) (step S905). Then, the serial communication flag is set to OFF (step S906), the timer is set for 1 second (step S907), and whether or not the timer has timed out, that is, the serial communication clock frequency is set to the non-transmission frequency. It is determined whether or not 1 second has passed since the start (step S908). Here, the serial communication flag is a flag for controlling whether serial communication is permitted or restricted, and is normally set to an on state, and the clock frequency setting is changed to a frequency at the time of non-transmission. When set to off. If the timer has not timed out (step S908; No), the effect control CPU 120 repeats the process of step S908. If the timer has timed out (step S908; Yes), the serial communication flag is set to ON (step S909). The process ends.

Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 30, the display-on command is received when the power is turned on and after the reset signal is transmitted from the dark display (at the start of demonstration movie switching, hereinafter, at the start of demo switching). Sent. In this embodiment, the serial communication clock frequency is set to a specific frequency as a default frequency when the power is turned on, and is set to a non-transmission frequency lower than the specific frequency after transmitting the display-on command. The As a result, in this embodiment, the display-on command is transmitted at a specific frequency (at a high speed) higher than the non-transmission frequency.
In the present embodiment, the specific frequency set when the power is turned on is set as the default frequency. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the non-transmission frequency may be set as the default frequency. In this case, if the non-transmission frequency is set as the default frequency when the power is turned on, it is necessary to increase the frequency from the non-transmission to the specific frequency before starting the transmission of the display-on command.

  In this embodiment, the specific frequency can be set to 795 kHz, for example, and the non-transmission frequency can be set to 500 kHz, for example. However, each frequency is not limited to this and is specified. Any frequency can be used as long as the frequency is higher than the frequency at the time of non-transmission.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 31, the process performed in response to the reception of each effect control command in the command analysis process will be described. The content shown in the item “processing content” shown in FIG. 31 is, for example, the processing executed in step S618. Further, the step number indicated in the item “processing content” indicates the step number in the flowchart shown in FIG. 25 and means that the corresponding step processing is executed. In addition, each reception flag and each storage area indicated in the item “processing content” are provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Setting the reception flag means turning on.

  For example, if the received effect control command is a variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122. Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets a variation pattern command reception flag.

  Further, for example, when the received effect control command is a display result designation command, the effect control CPU 120 forms the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 3 designation command) in the RAM 122. Is stored in the display result specification command storage area.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart of the effect control main process shown in FIG. 24, after executing the command analysis process of step S504, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control process (step S505). In the effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a game effect lamp 9, an LED for decoration, and Regarding the control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices such as the lighting operation of the light emitting device such as the LED 90, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like. After executing the effect control process in step S505, the effect control CPU 120 executes effect random number update processing, and shows the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the RAM 122 as various random number values used for effect control. The numerical data is updated by software (step S506). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 returns the process to step S502.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 24, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the value of the effect process flag (initially “0”) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit). Thus, any one of the following processes in steps S170 to S177 is selected and executed.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variable display start waiting process determines whether to start variable display of decorative symbols on the main image display device 5 based on whether the first variation start command or the second variation start command from the main board 11 is received. It includes processing to determine whether or not. When the first variation start command, the second variation start command, or the like is received and it is determined that the decorative display variable display on the main image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the decoration on the main image display device 5 corresponding to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to perform variable display of symbols and other various effects, it includes a process of determining a fixed decorative symbol and various effect control patterns according to the variation pattern of special symbols and the type of display result. The variable display start setting process ends when the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (for example, the effect control timer setting unit) of the RAM 122, and the effect determined in step S171. Various control data are read from the control pattern, and various effect control is performed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. After performing such effect control, for example, the end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the special symbol variation effect control pattern, or the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. In response to this, the final decorative symbol as the final stop symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is displayed in a completely stopped manner. When the finalized decorative symbol is displayed as a complete stop, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. When the hit start designation command is received, the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit gaming state, and the big hit type specified by the variable display result notification command received before that "Or" Uncertain change ", the value of the effect process flag is updated to" 5 ". If the hit start specifying command specifies the start of the small hit gaming state, or the hit start specifying command specifies the start of the big hit gaming state, the variable display result notification received before that If the big hit type specified by the command is “surprise”, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production process flag to “4”. When the effect control process timer times out without receiving a hit start designation command (when the hit start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed), the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “ It is determined that it is “lost”, and the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  The special winning opening short-term opening process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this big winning opening short-term opening process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the “surprise” big hit game state or the small hit game state, and the effect based on the set content Displaying images in the display areas of the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, and outputting sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13 In addition, various effects in the “surprise” big hit game state or the small hit game state, such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14 Control (for example, in the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, that the big hit or the small hit has occurred) Including) the execution effect control to knowledge. Further, for example, in response to receiving a big hit gaming state end command or a small hit gaming state end command from the main board 11, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the ending effect process. To “6”.

  The special winning opening normal opening process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In the special winning opening normal opening process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit gaming state of “probability change” or “non-probability change”, and the effect based on the set content Displaying images in the display areas of the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, and outputting sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13 In addition, various effects in the jackpot gaming state of “probability change” or “non-probability change” such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED by outputting a command (electric decoration signal) to the lamp control board 14 Control (production control for notifying that a big hit has occurred, for example, in the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d Including) the execution. In addition, for example, in response to receiving the jackpot gaming state end command from the main board 11, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to “6” which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. To do.

  The ending effect process of step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, and the effect image based on the set contents is displayed in the main image display device 5. Displaying in the display areas of the sub-image display devices 5a to 5d, outputting sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and commands to the lamp control board 14 Various effects control at the end of the big hit gaming state, such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED by the output of (electric decoration signal), is executed. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “0” which is an initial value.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S171 of FIG. 32 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 33, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the special figure display result is “lost” based on, for example, the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11. Is determined (step S521). When it is determined that the special figure display result is “losing” (step S521; Yes), the effect control CPU 120, for example, changes the decorative pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main board 11 as a decorative pattern. It is determined whether or not the display mode is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case of “non-reach” in which the display mode is not set (step S522).

  When it is determined that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; Yes), the production control CPU 120 determines a combination of a definite decorative symbol that is a final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination (step S523). As an example, the CPU 120 for effect control first calculates a random number for determining a left determined symbol that is updated by a random counter for effect provided in a predetermined area (for example, an effect control counter setting unit) of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122. The “left” decorative symbol display area in the display area of the main image display device 5 among the fixed decorative symbols is obtained by extracting the numerical data shown and referring to the left fixed symbol determining table prepared and stored in advance in the ROM 121. The left fixed decorative design that is stopped and displayed at 5L is determined. Next, numerical value data indicating a random number value for determining the right determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter is extracted, and the right determined symbol determining table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 is referred to. For example, the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the main image display device 5 is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the production random counter is extracted, and the medium fixed symbol determination table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 is referred to. From the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the main image display device 5 is determined.

  When it is determined in the process of step S522 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of fixed decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbol constituting the reach combination (step S524). . As an example, the effect control CPU 120 first extracts numerical data indicating random values for determining left and right determined symbols updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter, and the left and right prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121. By referring to the fixed symbol determination table, the symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed together in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the main image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols. Determine the same decorative design. Further, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or a random counter for production is extracted, and a medium fixed symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to. As a result, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the main image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, in the case where the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, By adding or subtracting a value (for example, “1”) to / from the symbol number of the medium finalized decorative symbol, the final decorative symbol may be a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in the process of step S521 that the special figure display result is not “lost” (step S521; No), the effect control CPU 120 has the special figure display result of “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. Alternatively, it is determined whether the special figure display result is “small hit” or other cases (step S525). The big hit type when the special figure display result is “big hit” may be specified by the effect control CPU 120 by, for example, reading the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11. When it is determined that it is “Accuracy” or “Small Hit” (step S525; Yes), the effect control CPU 120, for example, in the case of “Accuracy” such as a short-term opening chance or a predetermined reach combination, ”Is determined, the combination of the confirmed decorative pattern that is the result of variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the case of“ ”is determined (step S526). Note that in the processes of steps S523 and S524, a combination of a fixed decorative pattern that is a variable display result of a decorative pattern corresponding to the case of “surprise” or “small hit”, such as a short-term opening chance, a predetermined reach combination, or the like. May not be determined. In this case, for example, if such a combination is determined, a decorative symbol that constitutes a reach combination or a non-reach combination prepared in advance that does not correspond to these combinations is determined (selected) as a final decorative symbol. To do.

  As an example of the processing in step S526, when the variation pattern PC1-1 is specified by the variation pattern command, a combination of the fixed decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols constituting any one of a plurality of types of short-term opening opportunities is selected. decide. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the chance eye updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter, and stores the predetermined data prepared and stored in the ROM 121 in advance. By referring to the chance eye determination table, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols constituting any of the short-term opening chance eyes may be determined.

  As another example of the processing in step S526, the effect control CPU 120 determines a predetermined reach combination that is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter when the change pattern PC2-1 is designated by the change pattern command. Numeric data indicating random values for use is extracted, and a case of “surprise” or “small hit” is dealt with by referring to a predetermined reach combination determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121. What is necessary is just to determine the combination of the fixed decoration symbol used as the last stop symbol which comprises the predetermined reach combination. Alternatively, when the variation pattern PC2-1 is designated, the same processing as in step S524 is executed, so that the same is displayed in a stopped manner in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. In the meantime, by executing a process different from that in step S524, a special decoration pattern (short-term release) that is not used in the variable display of the decoration pattern in the normal state in the “medium” decoration pattern display area 5C. You may decide to stop displaying the chance symbol. The reach decorative symbol including the short-term opening chance symbol may be included in a predetermined reach combination corresponding to the short-term opening chance or “surprise” or “small hit”.

  Even when the variation pattern PC2-1 is specified and the decorative display variable display mode is the reach display mode, for example, the same decorative design is aligned in the “left” and “right” decorative design display areas 5L and 5R. Variable display of “slip” that changes the decorative symbol displayed temporarily by changing the decorative symbol again in the “right” decorative symbol variable display area 5R. In addition to performing an effect, a combination of decorative symbols constituting one of the short-term opening chances may be derived and displayed by stopping display of a predetermined decorative symbol in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. Good. In this case, in the process of step S526, even when any one of the variation patterns PC2-1 is designated, a combination of the confirmed decorative symbols constituting any one of the short-term opening chances may be determined.

  In the process of step S525, when it is determined that “non-probability change” or “probability change” other than “surprise accuracy” or “small hit” (step S525; No), the effect control CPU 120 performs the final stop constituting the big hit combination. A combination of the confirmed decorative symbols to be symbols is determined (step S527). As an example, the effect control CPU 120 first extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the jackpot fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the jackpot determination symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, for example, so that “left”, “middle”, “right” in the display area of the main image display device 5 is used. The decorative symbols with the same symbol number that are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are determined. At this time, the CPU 120 for effect control determines the same decorative design according to the jackpot type specified by, for example, a variable display result notification command.

  After performing any of the processes of steps S523, S524, S526, and S527, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect pattern setting processing (step S529).

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern to be used later, from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance, based on the effect pattern set in the process of step S529 (step S530). .

  Subsequently, for example, the effect control CPU 120 sets an initial value of an effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (such as an effect control timer setting unit) of the RAM 122 corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern command. (Step S531).

  Then, the CPU 120 for effect control performs setting for starting the variation of the decorative design or the like in the image display device 5 (step S532). For example, the effect control CPU 120 transmits a display control command designated by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined as the use pattern in step S531 to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S533), and ends the variable display start setting process.

  In addition, since one hold storage is consumed with the start of variable display, in the process of step S532, display is performed depending on whether the first variation start command or the second variation start command is received from the main board 11. By performing a control such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the control unit 123, the start prize is obtained by changing the color of a predetermined area of the start prize storage display area 5H of the image display device 5 or the like. A process of changing the hold storage display in the storage display area 5H, reducing the hold display symbol by one, and reducing the number of variable display holds that can be specified by the hold storage display by one is also performed.

  Specifically, when receiving the first variation start command, the effect control CPU 120 changes the color of a predetermined area of the start winning storage display area 5H to the left of the starting winning storage display area 5H, for example. The displayed hold display symbol is reduced by one (the rightmost hold display symbol in the left hold display symbol is deleted), and the number of the first special figure hold memory that can be specified by the display of the hold memory is reduced by one. When the CPU 120 for effect control receives the second variation start command, for example, by changing the color of a predetermined area of the start winning storage display area 5H, the hold display displayed on the right side of the start winning storage display area 5H. The symbol is reduced by one (the rightmost hold display symbol in the right hold display symbol is deleted), the second hold memory display in the start winning memory display area 5H is changed, and can be specified by the display of the hold memory. The number of stored second special figure hold is reduced by one.

  In the variable display effect process of step S172 described above, a message effect process in which the main image display device 5 displays an image of a message for the player is performed.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the message effect process in the variable display effect process in step S172. In the message effect process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the message effect execution flag indicating that the message effect is being executed is on (step S700). The message effect execution flag is set in the RAM 122, for example. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the message effect execution flag set in the RAM 122 is ON.

  When it is determined that the message effect execution flag is OFF (step S700; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the change pattern designated by the change pattern command from the main board 11 is PA2-3, PA2-5, PA3. 3 or PA3-5 is determined (step S701).

  When it is determined that the variation pattern is not any of PA2-3, PA2-5, PA3-3, and PA3-5 (step S701; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the message effect process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern is any of PA2-3, PA2-5, PA3-3, and PA3-5 (step S701; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 selects in step S530 of FIG. Among the effect control patterns, the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are moved in the execution of the effect based on the effect control pattern of the message effect (step S702). For example, the effect control CPU 120 generates a drive control signal for moving the sub image display devices 5a to 5d and outputs the drive control signal to the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. The drive control signal is a combination of pulse power for driving the first stepping motor mounted on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d and pulse power for driving the second stepping motor. The motor drive circuit mounted on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d drives the first stepping motor and the second stepping motor in accordance with the drive control signal, and moves the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. In the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, the amount of linear movement increases as the number of pulse powers for driving the first stepping motor increases, and the number of pulse powers for driving the second stepping motor increases. , The amount of rotation increases.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the movement of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d has ended (step S703). For example, the first stepping motor is driven according to one pulse power that is a drive control signal, and the time during which the sub-image display devices 5a to 5d move linearly by a predetermined distance, according to one pulse power that is a drive control signal. The time for which the second stepping motor is driven and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are rotated by a predetermined amount of rotation is fixed. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 multiplies the predetermined number of pulse power outputs corresponding to the first stepping motor by the time during which the sub image display devices 5a to 5d move linearly according to one pulse power. When the time has elapsed and the number of outputs of the pulse power corresponding to the predetermined second stepping motor is multiplied by the time for which the sub image display devices 5a to 5d rotate according to one pulse power, It is determined that the movement of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d has been completed. Otherwise, it is determined that the movement of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d has not been completed.

  When it is determined that the movement of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d has not ended (step S703; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the message effect process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the movement of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d has been completed (step S703; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the sub image display device 5a according to the driving of the first stepping motor and the second stepping motor. The position of ˜5d is specified (step S704).

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 has the sub image display devices 5a to 5d in the initial positions (positions at the four corners of the main image display device 5), and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d have the first positions. When the number of steps of each of the first stepping motor and the second stepping motor is 0, counting of the number of pulse powers (number of steps) output from the effect control CPU 120 to the sub image display devices 5a to 5d is started. . Note that the moving direction of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d driven by the first stepping motor is reversed between the case where the pulse power is positive and the case where the pulse power is negative, and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d driven by the second stepping motor are reversed. The direction of rotation is reversed. That is, the direction of linear movement and the direction of rotation of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are reversed depending on whether the pulse power is positive or negative. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 increases the number of steps by 1 when the pulse power is positive, and decreases the number of steps by 1 when the pulse power is negative.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 refers to, for example, the sub-image display device mode table shown in FIG. 35 stored in the RAM 122, and is uniquely determined by the number of steps of the first stepping motor and the number of steps of the second stepping motor. The coordinates of the four corners of the image display devices 5a to 5d are specified. Note that the coordinates of the four corners of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are associated with the sub image display device mode table shown in FIG. 35 every 10 steps. For this reason, if the current number of steps of the first stepping motor and the number of steps of the second stepping motor are not an integral multiple of 10 at the timing of step S704, the effect control CPU 120 determines the step of the current first stepping motor. The coordinates of the four corners of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are specified in accordance with the number of steps obtained by rounding off the number and the number of steps of the second stepping motor. The configuration of the table is not limited to this, and the coordinates of the four corners of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d may be associated with each step, or the four corners of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d may be associated with each predetermined step. May be associated with each other.

  In the sub image display device mode table shown in FIG. 35, the coordinates of the four corners of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, and the synchronous display effect described later by the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are executed. The LED 90 at the edge of the sub image display device to be turned off is associated with the LED 90. During the execution of the synchronous display effect, the effect control CPU 120 determines each edge according to the coordinates of the four corners of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, that is, the positional relationship between the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. Among the LEDs 90 arranged in the sections 55a to 55d, the LEDs 90 listed in the sub image display device mode table are turned off, and the other LEDs 90 are turned on. As described above, in the sub-image display device mode table, among the LEDs 90 arranged at the respective edges 55a to 55d, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the one to be turned off are different are displayed as the sub-image display. What is necessary is just to set beforehand according to the coordinate of the four corners of apparatus 5a-5d.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart shown in FIG. 34, after executing the process of step S704, the CPU 120 for effect control is based on the positions of the sub image display apparatuses 5a to 5d specified in the process of step S704. Among the display areas, an area (gap area) corresponding to the gap between the sub image display devices 5a to 5d is specified (step S705). For example, the main image display device 5 does not move, the coordinates of the four corners of the main image display device 5 are fixed, and the coordinates are stored in the RAM 122. The effect control CPU 120 uses the main image display device 5 based on the four corner coordinates of the main image display device 5 stored in the RAM 122 and the four corner coordinates of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d specified in the process of step S704. It is possible to specify the gap region at. The coordinate system of the main image display device 5 and the coordinate system of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are common.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 causes the sub image display devices 5a to 5d to display character images (option character images) as options to be selected by the player, and the edge portions 55a to 55a of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. All the LEDs 90 arranged at 55d are turned on. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays a selection instruction message image, which is a message image prompting the player to select an option character image, in the gap area in the main image display device 5 (step S706).

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines an option character image to be displayed on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, and outputs a display control command to the display control unit 123 according to the determination. The display control unit 123 generates image data of different option characters for each of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120, and outputs the image data to the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. The sub image display devices 5a to 5d display option character images corresponding to the input image data. At this time, the CPU 120 for effect control outputs to the lamp control board 14 an electrical decoration signal for lighting all the LEDs 90 arranged on the edge portions 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. The lamp control board 14 drives all the LEDs 90 arranged on the edge portions 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d based on the illumination signal from the effect control CPU 120. That is, the effect control CPU 120 does not restrict the lighting of the LEDs 90 arranged on the edges 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d during execution of the message effect.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines a selection instruction message image to be displayed on the main image display device 5 and outputs a display control command to the display control unit 123 according to the determination. This display control command includes information on the gap region in the main image display device 5 as a region where the selection instruction message image is to be displayed. The display control unit 123 generates image data of a selection instruction message based on a display control command from the effect control CPU 120 and outputs the image data to the main image display device 5. The main image display device 5 displays a selection instruction message image corresponding to the input image data in the gap area.

  After executing the process of step S707, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the message effect executing flag to ON (step S707).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the message effect execution flag is on (step S700; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the player has performed an operation of selecting one of the option characters ( Step S709). For example, the player selects one of the option character images displayed on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d by tilting the stick controller 31A, and further presses the push button 31B to select the option character. Confirm the image selection. The effect control CPU 120 can recognize the selection operation of the option character image by the player based on the operation detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B.

  When it is determined that the player has performed an operation of selecting any of the option characters (step S709; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the selected option character image on all of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. It is displayed (step S710).

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines an option character image corresponding to the selection operation recognized in the process of step S709 as the option character image to be displayed on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, and displays the option character image according to the determination. A display control command is output to the control unit 123. The display control unit 123 generates image data of option characters based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120 and outputs the image data to the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. The sub image display devices 5a to 5d display option character images corresponding to the input image data.

  In step S710, after the selected option character image is displayed on all of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, or an operation of selecting any of the option characters by the player in the process of step S709 is performed. If it is determined that there is not (step S709; No), the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether it is the end timing of the message effect (step S711). The effect control CPU 120 measures, for example, the elapsed time from the start of the message effect, and determines that the measurement time is the end timing of the message effect at the timing when the message effect time corresponding to the effect control pattern is reached.

  When it is determined that it is not the end timing of the message effect (step S711; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the message effect process. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the message effect (step S711; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs message effect end control (step S712). For example, the effect control CPU 120 sends a message effect image output end command to the display control unit 123. The display control unit 123 controls the display end of the selection instruction message image on the main image display device 5 and the display end of the option character image on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d in response to the output end command. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a turn-off control command to the lamp control board 14, and turns off the LEDs 90 arranged on the edge portions 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. Further, the effect control CPU 120 generates a drive control signal for returning the position of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d to the initial position, and outputs the drive control signal to the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. The motor drive circuits mounted on the sub-image display devices 5a to 5d drive the first stepping motor and the second stepping motor in accordance with the drive control signal, so that the sub-image display devices 5a to 5d are in the initial state positions. Move.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the message effect execution flag to OFF (step S713).

  FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating an example of image display in the message effect process in the variable display effect process. FIG. 36 shows an example in which a message effect is executed in parallel with a reach effect. When the main image display device 5 transitions from the decorative display variable display state shown in FIG. 36 (A) to the reach effect state shown in FIG. 36 (B), the sub image display devices 5a to 5d start to move. . When the movement of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d shown in FIG. 36C is finished, different option character images 500a to 500d are displayed on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, respectively. Further, from the gap region of the main image display device 5, specifically, the gap region between the sub image display device 5a and the sub image display device 5c, between the sub image display device 5b and the sub image display device 5d. The selection instruction message image 500 is displayed over the gap area. If the selection instruction message image 500 cannot be displayed at once, the selection instruction message image 500 is scroll-displayed as shown in FIGS. 36 (C) and 36 (D).

  Moreover, in the variable display effect process of step S172 described above, the sub image effect process in which the sub image display devices 5a to 5d display a part of the image that should be displayed by the main image display device 5 is performed.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the sub-image effect process in the variable display effect process in step S172. In the sub image effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a sub image effect executing flag indicating that the sub image effect is being executed is on (step S720). The sub image effect executing flag is set in the RAM 122, for example. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub image effect executing flag set in the RAM 122 is ON.

  When it is determined that the sub-image effect execution flag is off (step S720; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the change pattern designated by the change pattern command from the main board 11 is PA2-3, PA2-5, It is determined whether it is either PA3-3 or PA3-5 (step S721).

  When it is determined that the variation pattern is not any of PA2-3, PA2-5, PA3-3, and PA3-5 (step S721; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the sub-image effect process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern is any of PA2-3, PA2-5, PA3-3, and PA3-5 (step S721; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 selects in step S530 of FIG. Among the effect control patterns, in the execution of the effect based on the effect control pattern of the sub-image effect, the main image display device 5 displays the image of the decorative design corresponding to the variable display (variable display image) (step S722).

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines a variable display image as an image to be displayed on the main image display device 5, and outputs a display control command to the display control unit 123 according to the determination. Here, the effect control CPU 120 excludes, from among the images that should be displayed on the main image display device 5, images other than the variable display image from the display target of the main image display device 5. The display control unit 123 generates image data of the variably displayed image based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120 and outputs the image data to the main image display device 5. The main image display device 5 displays a variable display image corresponding to the input image data.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 inherently displays the main image on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d in the effect execution based on the effect control pattern of the sub image effect among the effect control patterns selected in step S530 of FIG. The reserved memory image indicating the number of reserved memories, the game mode image indicating the current game mode, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, which are images relating to the progress of the game to be displayed on the display device 5. An image of the fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol displayed on the right side, a right-handed instruction image for instructing the player to launch a game medium such as a game ball to the right side of the game area, and the like are displayed. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 turns on all the LEDs 90 arranged on the edges 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d without restricting the lighting (step S723).

  For example, the CPU 120 for effect control displays, as the images to be displayed on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, the reserved memory image, the game mode image, the fourth symbol image, the right-handed image indicating the reserved memory number specified by the reserved memory number designation command An instruction image or the like is determined, and a display control command is output to the display control unit 123 according to the determination. The display control command includes information instructing that the stored storage image, the game mode image, the fourth symbol image, the right-handed instruction image, and the like are displayed on different sub-image display devices 5a to 5d. The display control unit 123 generates image data such as an on-hold storage image, a game mode image, a fourth symbol image, and a right-handed instruction image based on a display control command from the effect control CPU 120, and a sub-image display device Output to 5a to 5d. The sub image display devices 5a to 5d display a reserved storage image, a game mode image, a fourth symbol image, a right-handed instruction image, etc. according to the input image data.

  In the present embodiment, the VDP 362 in the display control unit 123 displays image data output to the main display system output unit MK to display an image on the main image display device 5, and images to the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. For display, color tone correction is performed on the image data output to the sub-display system output unit SK. For the color tone correction, for example, brightness correction for adjusting the brightness and contrast of images displayed on the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, and gamma correction for adjusting numerical values indicating the response characteristics of the image gradation. There are methods.

  Specifically, the VDP 362 corrects the color tone of each image data when drawing in the VRAM, or collectively corrects the color tone of the image data drawn in the VRAM. The color tone of the image displayed on the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d is corrected by performing a filtering process using a mask pattern prepared by recording in advance in the CGROM. Note that an IC (integrated circuit) for color tone correction may be externally attached to the outside of the VDP 362, and the color tone of image data output from the sub display system output unit SK may be corrected by the IC.

  In the present embodiment, the color tone of the image displayed on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d with a small display area is corrected so as to match the color tone of the image displayed on the main image display device 5 with a large display area. Specifically, first, a reference color (for example, white) is specified, and an image to be displayed on the main image display device 5 for the specified color to be displayed on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. Correct to match the color tone. Since the sub image display devices 5a to 5d use the same liquid crystal panels 401a to 401d, the data required for color tone correction may be used in common for the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. Data (correction amount) required for color tone correction is recorded as a mask pattern or the like in a predetermined area of the CGROM, and all colors other than the specified color are corrected using the mask pattern or the like.

  Thereby, for example, even if a portion displayed in white in the main image display device 5 is displayed in a blue color or a yellow color in the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, the color tone is corrected. The difference in color from the image displayed on the main image display device 5 can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to realize an image display that does not give a sense of incongruity between the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. Further, since it is adapted to the main image display device 5 having a large display area, it is possible to reduce a sense of incongruity according to a large conspicuous place. Furthermore, by correcting all colors based on a specific color, it is possible to realize a display that does not give a sense of discomfort among a plurality of display devices such as the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d.

  In addition, you may correct | amend the color tone of the image displayed on the main image display apparatus 5 so that it may match with the color tone of the image displayed on the sub image display apparatuses 5a-5d. Further, an intermediate value of a numerical value indicating a color tone between the image displayed on the main image display device 5 and the images displayed on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d is calculated, and both images are corrected to the calculated intermediate value. May be. Accordingly, for example, it is possible to cope with a case where correction cannot be performed beyond the range where color tone correction is possible, for example, when white is to be made more white.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the sub image effect executing flag to ON (step S724).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-image effect execution flag is on (step S720; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether it is the end timing of the sub-image effect (step S726). For example, the effect control CPU 120 measures the elapsed time from the start of the sub-image effect, and when the measurement time reaches the sub-image effect time corresponding to the effect control pattern, the sub-image effect ends. judge.

  When it is determined that it is not the end timing of the sub image effect (step S726; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the sub image effect process. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the sub image effect (step S726; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the sub image effect end control (step S727). The effect control CPU 120 sends, for example, an output termination command to the display control unit 123 such as an on-hold storage image in the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. The display control unit 123 controls the display end of the hold storage images and the like in the sub image display devices 5a to 5d according to the output end command.

  After executing the process of step S727, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the sub image effect executing flag to OFF (step S728).

  FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating an example of image display in the sub-image effect process in the variable display effect process. As shown in FIG. 38, in the main image display device 5, when the decorative symbol variable display image 501a is displayed, the game mode is an image related to the progress of the game to be originally displayed on the main image display device 5. The image 505a is displayed on the sub-image display device 5a, the right-handed instruction image 505b is displayed on the sub-image display device 5b, the fourth symbol image is displayed on the sub-image display device 5c, and the reserved storage image is displayed on the sub-image display device 5d. .

  Further, in the above-described process at the time of normal opening of the big winning opening in step S175, the sub image display process in which the sub image display devices 5a to 5d display a part of the image that should be displayed by the main image display device 5 is performed. .

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub image effect process in the process at the time of normal opening of the big winning opening in step S175. In the sub-image effect process in the process when the big prize opening is normally opened, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the fanfare in the case of a 15 round big hit (start of the big hit game state) output from the main board 11 and starts the big hit It is determined whether or not a designated command has been input (step S800). For example, when the big winning opening normal opening process is started, a big hit start designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. When the jackpot start designation command is input, the effect control CPU 120 turns on a jackpot start designation command input completion flag indicating that the jackpot start designation command has been input to the RAM 122. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been input based on whether or not the jackpot start designation command input completion flag is ON.

  When it is determined that the jackpot start designation command has not been input (step S800; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the sub-image effect process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot start designation command has been input (step S800; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fanfare effect executed flag indicating that the fanfare effect has been executed is on. Is determined (step S801). For example, the fanfare effect executed flag is set in the RAM 122. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fanfare effect execution completion flag set in the RAM 122 is on in the process of step S801.

  When it is determined that the fanfare effect execution completion flag is not on (step S801; No), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to output a fanfare sound that is a sound effect (step S802). For example, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a fanfare sound effect signal to the sound control board 13 and controls the speakers 8L and 8R to output a fanfare sound.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the fanfare effect executed flag to ON (step S803).

  After executing the process of step S803 or when it is determined in the process of step S801 that the fanfare effect executed flag has been turned on (step S801; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is output from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not a special winning opening opening designation command that is an effect control command for designating opening of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in the round game has been input (step S804). For example, when one round game is started, a special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The effect control CPU 120, when a special winning opening open designation command is input, sets a special winning opening open designation command input flag indicating that the special winning opening open designation command has already been input to the RAM 122. In the process of step S804, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special winning opening open designation command has been input based on whether or not the special winning opening open designation command input completion flag is ON. judge.

  When it is determined that the special winning opening opening designation command has not been input (step S804; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the sub-image effect process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special winning opening opening designation command has been input (step S804; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 turns on the sub image effect executing flag indicating that the sub image effect is being executed. It is determined whether or not (step S805). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is ON with reference to the sub image effect executing flag set in the RAM 122, as in step S720 of FIG.

  When it is determined that the sub-image effect execution flag is off (step S805; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the change pattern designated by the change pattern command from the main board 11 is PA3-2, PA3-3, It is determined whether it is any one of PA3-5 (step S806).

  When it is determined that the variation pattern is neither PA 3-2, PA 3-3, or 3-5 (step S806; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the sub-image effect process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern is any one of PA3-2, PA3-3, and PA3-5 (step S806; Yes), the production control CPU 120 is based on the input command for opening the big prize opening. The current number of rounds is specified (step S807).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 causes the main image display device 5 to enter the big hit gaming state in the execution of the effect based on the effect control pattern of the sub image effect among the effect control patterns selected in the process of step S530 in FIG. A corresponding background image (main jackpot background image) is displayed and superimposed on the main jackpot background image to display a character image (big hit character image) corresponding to the jackpot gaming state (step S808).

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines a main jackpot background image and a jackpot character image as images to be displayed on the main image display device 5, and outputs a display control command to the display control unit 123 according to the determination. Here, the effect control CPU 120 excludes images other than the main jackpot background image and the jackpot character image from the display targets of the main image display device 5 among the images that should be displayed on the main image display device 5 originally. . In addition, the display control command includes information such as the image data rendering order so that the big hit character image is displayed superimposed on the main big hit background image. Based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120, the display control unit 123 generates image data of a composite image in which the big hit character image is superimposed on the main big hit background image, and outputs the image data to the main image display device 5. The main image display device 5 displays a composite image in which the big hit character image is superimposed on the main big hit background image according to the input image data.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 causes the sub image display devices 5a to 5d to receive a big hit game in the execution of the effect based on the effect control pattern of the sub image effect among the effect control patterns selected in the process of step S530 of FIG. A background image corresponding to the state (sub jackpot background image) is displayed and superimposed on the sub jackpot background image, which is an image related to the jackpot gaming state that should be displayed on the main image display device 5 originally. Round number image indicating the number of rounds, jackpot mode image indicating the type of jackpot, number-of-balls image indicating the number of winning balls that have been paid out after reaching the jackpot game state, and the number of times of repeated control to the jackpot game state (continuous The image of the continuous number of times indicating the number of times of change) is displayed (step S809).

  The effect control CPU 120 determines, for example, a sub jackpot background image, a round number image, a jackpot mode image, a ball number image, a continuous number of times image, and the like as images to be displayed on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. In response to the determination, a display control command is output to the display control unit 123. The number of rounds indicated by the number-of-rounds image is specified based on, for example, the number of rounds indicated by the special winning opening open designation command. The big hit type indicated by the big hit mode image is specified by the type of the big hit start designation command, the command that can specify the variation pattern and the big hit type. It is specified by a command input from the main board 11 based on the detected number of passes of the game ball, and the number of consecutive chunks indicated in the consecutive number of times image is specified by the number of input of the big hit start designation command. The display control command includes information for instructing that the number-of-rounds image, the jackpot mode image, the number-of-balls image, the continuous number-of-plays image, etc. are displayed on different sub-image display devices 5a to 5d, and the sub-hit-hit background image Information such as the drawing order of the image data is included so that the round number image, the big hit mode image, the number of appearance balls image, the continuous number of times image, and the like are displayed in a superimposed manner. Based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120, the display control unit 123 is configured to display a composite image in which a round number image, a big hit mode image, an output number image, a continuous number of times image, and the like are superimposed on the sub jackpot background image. Image data is generated and output to the main image display device 5. The main image display device 5 displays a composite image in which a round number image, a big hit mode image, an output number image, a continuous number of times image, and the like are superimposed on the sub jackpot background image according to the input image data.

  Here, the VDP 362 in the display control unit 123 is similar to step S723 in FIG. 37, and the image data output to the main display system output unit MK to display an image on the main image display device 5 and the sub image display device. In order to display images on 5a to 5d, color tone correction of the image data output to the sub display system output unit SK is performed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the sub image effect executing flag to ON (step S810). After executing the process of step S810, the CPU 120 for effect control ends the sub-image effect process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-image effect execution flag is on (step S805; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 specifies a command after opening the big prize opening that specifies closing of the special variable winning ball device 7 in the round game. It is determined whether or not has been input (step S811). For example, when one round game is completed, a designation command after the special winning opening is opened is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. When the designation control command after opening the special prize opening is input, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the designation command input completion flag after opening the special prize opening, which is stored in the RAM 122 and indicates that the designation command after opening the special prize opening has been input. Set to. In the process of step S811, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the designation command after opening the special prize opening has been input based on whether or not the designation command input completed flag after opening the special prize opening is ON. judge.

  When it is determined that the designation command has not been input after the special winning opening is opened (step S811; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the sub-image effect process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the designation command has been input after the special winning opening is opened (step S811; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls the end of the sub image effect in accordance with the end of the round game (step S812). . For example, the effect control CPU 120 sends an output end command such as a round number image in the sub image display devices 5 a to 5 d to the display control unit 123. The display control unit 123 controls the display end of the round number images and the like in the sub image display devices 5a to 5d according to the output end command. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 outputs to the lamp control board 14 an electrical decoration signal for turning off the LEDs 90 arranged at the edges 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. The illumination of the 5d edge portions 55a to 55d is terminated.

  After executing the processing of step S812, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the sub image effect executing flag to OFF (step S813). Here, when the flag indicating that the special winning opening is open and the flag indicating that the designation command has been input after opening the special winning opening is set to ON, the effect control CPU 120 specifies that the special winning opening is being opened. Both the input completion flag and the designation command input completion flag after the special winning opening are opened are set to OFF.

  The effect control CPU 120 designates the start of ending, which is output from the main board 11, and designates the end of jackpot 1 designation command for designating that the time-short state after the jackpot is the first advantageous state, or the start of ending. It is determined whether or not the big hit end 2 designation command for designating that the short-time state after the big hit is the second advantageous state has been input (step S814). For example, when the big winning opening normal opening process ends, a big hit end 1 designation command or a big hit end 2 designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. When the effect control CPU 120 inputs a jackpot end 1 designation command or a jackpot end 2 designation command, the jackpot end designation command indicates that the jackpot end 1 designation command or jackpot end 2 designation command has already been input to the RAM 122. Set the entered flag on. In step S814, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot end designation command has been input based on whether or not the jackpot end designation command input completion flag is ON.

  When it is determined that the jackpot end 1 designation command or jackpot end 2 designation command has not been input (step S814; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the sub-image effect process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot end 1 designation command or jackpot end 2 designation command has been input (step S814; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the fanfare effect execution completed flag to OFF (step S815). Here, when the jackpot start designation command input completed flag and the jackpot end designation command input completed flag are set to ON, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the jackpot start designation command input completed flag and the jackpot end designation designation. Set all command input flags to off.

  After executing the process of step S815, the CPU 120 for effect control updates the value of the effect process flag to “6” that is a value corresponding to the ending effect process (step S816), and ends the sub-image effect process.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of image display in the sub-image effect process in the special winning opening normal opening process. As shown in FIG. 40, when the jackpot character image 501 is displayed on the main image display device 5 so as to be superimposed on the main background image 502, the image related to the jackpot gaming state that should be displayed on the main image display device 5 originally. The big hit mode image 511a is superimposed on the sub background image 512a and displayed on the sub image display device 5a, and the round number image 511b is superimposed on the sub background image 512b and displayed on the sub image display device 5b. The number-of-balls image 511c is superimposed on the sub background image 512c and displayed on the sub image display device 5c, and the continuous channel number image 511d is superimposed on the sub background image 512d and displayed on the sub image display device 5d. Here, the sub background images 512a to 512d have the same shape and color as the main background image 502.

  In the variable display effect processing in step S172 described above, one image may be displayed with continuity (relevance) by the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d (one image is displayed). The main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are divided and displayed. One image is displayed with continuity (relevance) by the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. An image is divided and displayed on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d), and a synchronous display effect process may be performed.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the synchronous display effect process in the variable display effect process in step S172. In the synchronized display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the synchronized display effect executing flag indicating that the synchronized display effect is being executed is on (step S750). For example, the synchronous display effect executing flag is set in the RAM 122. In step S750, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the synchronous display effect executing flag set in the RAM 122 is on.

  When it is determined that the synchronous display effect execution flag is off (step S750; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the change pattern designated by the change pattern command from the main board 11 is PA2-3, PA2-5, It is determined whether it is either PA3-3 or PA3-5 (step S751).

  When it is determined that the variation pattern is not any of PA2-3, PA2-5, PA3-3, and PA3-5 (step S751; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the synchronous display effect process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern is any of PA2-3, PA2-5, PA3-3, and PA3-5 (step S751; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 selects in step S530 of FIG. Of the effect control patterns, the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are moved in the execution of the effect based on the effect control pattern of the synchronous display effect (step S752). For example, the effect control CPU 120 generates a drive control signal for moving the sub image display devices 5a to 5d and outputs the drive control signal to the sub image display devices 5a to 5d as in step S702 of FIG. The drive control signal is a combination of pulse power for driving the first stepping motor mounted on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d and pulse power for driving the second stepping motor. The motor drive circuit mounted on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d drives the first stepping motor and the second stepping motor in accordance with the drive control signal, and moves the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. In the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, the amount of linear movement increases as the number of pulse powers for driving the first stepping motor increases, and the number of pulse powers for driving the second stepping motor increases. , The amount of rotation increases.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the positions of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d according to the driving of the first stepping motor and the second stepping motor (step S754).

  For example, as in step S704 of FIG. 34, the effect control CPU 120 has the sub image display devices 5a to 5d at the initial position (positions at the four corners of the main image display device 5). The number of pulse powers output from the effect control CPU 120 to the sub image display devices 5a to 5d when the number of steps of the first stepping motor and the second stepping motor in the image display devices 5a to 5d are both 0. Start counting (number of steps). Note that the moving direction of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d driven by the first stepping motor is reversed between the case where the pulse power is positive and the case where the pulse power is negative, and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d driven by the second stepping motor are reversed. The direction of rotation is reversed. That is, the direction of linear movement and the direction of rotation of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are reversed depending on whether the pulse power is positive or negative. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 increases the number of steps by 1 when the pulse power is positive, and decreases the number of steps by 1 when the pulse power is negative.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 refers to, for example, the sub image display device mode table shown in FIG. 35 stored in the RAM 122, and is uniquely determined by the number of steps of the first stepping motor and the number of steps of the second stepping motor. The coordinates of the four corners of the image display devices 5a to 5d (coordinates in the coordinate system common to the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d) are specified. In the sub image display device mode table shown in FIG. 35, the coordinates of the four corners of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are associated every 10 steps. Therefore, if the current number of steps of the first stepping motor and the number of steps of the second stepping motor are not an integral multiple of 10 at the timing of executing the process of step S754, the presentation control CPU 120 The coordinates of the four corners of the sub-image display devices 5a to 5d are specified according to the number of steps obtained by rounding off the number of steps of the stepping motor and the number of steps of the second stepping motor. Further, the configuration of the sub image display device mode table is not limited to this, and the coordinates of the four corners of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d may be associated with each step, or the sub image display device may be associated with each predetermined step. The coordinates of the four corners 5a to 5d may be associated with each other.

  Returning to FIG. 41, the description will be continued. Next, the CPU 120 for effect control displays one image for the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d based on the positions of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d specified in the process of step S754. Dividing and assigning (step S755). For example, the main image display device 5 does not move, the coordinates of the four corners of the main image display device 5 are fixed, and the coordinates are stored in the RAM 122. The effect control CPU 120 uses the main image display device 5 based on the coordinates of the four corners of the main image display device 5 stored in the RAM 122 and the coordinates of the four corners of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d specified in step S754. Among the display areas, the display area (superimposition area) on which each of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d is superimposed is specified. Further, the effect control CPU 120 assigns one image to the main image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 includes an image included in a superimposition region generated by the sub image display device 5a, and an image protruding from the main image display device 5 and included in the sub image display device 5a. Is assigned to the sub-image display device 5a. Similarly, the effect control CPU 120 includes an image included in a superimposition region generated by the sub image display device 5b and an image protruding from the main image display device 5 and included in the sub image display device 5b. Are assigned to the sub-image display device 5b, and are included in the superimposition area generated by the sub-image display device 5c, and the image that protrudes from the main image display device 5 and is sub-image display device 5c. The included image is assigned to the sub-image display device 5c, and the image included in the overlapping region generated by the sub-image display device 5d and the image that protrudes from the main image display device 5 among the one image and is displayed as a sub-image display. The image included in the device 5d is assigned to the sub image display device 5d.

  Here, allocating one image to the main image display device 5 means, for example, that the display position of the image when the one image is displayed on the main image display device 5 in the coordinate system of the main image display device 5. It means to specify by coordinates. In addition, assigning the image included in the superimposition area and the image protruding from the main image display device 5 and included in the sub image display devices 5a to 5d to the sub image display devices 5a to 5d is one image. Among these, the image of the superimposition area and the image protruding from the main image display device 5 and included in the sub image display devices 5a to 5d (hereinafter, the image of the superimposition area and the image protruding from the main image display device 5 and sub The images included in the image display devices 5a to 5d are collectively referred to as “sub-image display device target image”) by the coordinates in the coordinate system of one image, and the display position of the sub-image display device target image Is designated by coordinates in the respective coordinate systems of the sub-image display devices 5a to 5d.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the assigned image on the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d (step S756).

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 outputs, to the display control unit 123, a display control command for an image to be displayed on the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. The display control command includes information for specifying one image assigned to the main image display device 5, coordinates in the coordinate system of the main image display device 5 indicating the display position of the one image, and the overlapping region. Information on the coordinates in the coordinate system of one image representing the image and the coordinates in the respective coordinate systems of the sub-image display devices 5a to 5d indicating the display position of the image of the overlapping region is included. The display control unit 123 generates image data corresponding to one image based on a display control command from the effect control CPU 120, and the coordinates of the main image display device 5 indicating the display position of the one image. The coordinates in the system are designated and output to the main image display device 5. The main image display device 5 displays one image corresponding to the image data input at the display position designated by the coordinates.

  Further, the display control unit 123 displays the sub image to be displayed on the sub image display device 5a based on the coordinates in the coordinate system of one image indicating the display position of the sub image display device target image to be displayed on the sub image display device 5a. Image data corresponding to the target image of the image display device is generated, and the coordinate in the coordinate system of the sub image display device 5a indicating the display position of the target image of the sub image display device to be displayed on the sub image display device 5a. It designates and outputs to the sub image display apparatus 5a. The sub image display device 5a displays an image corresponding to the image data input at the display position specified by the coordinates. The display control for the sub image display devices 5b to 5d is the same. That is, the display control unit 123 displays the sub image to be displayed on the sub image display device 5b based on the coordinates in the coordinate system of one image indicating the display position of the sub image display device target image to be displayed on the sub image display device 5b. Image data corresponding to the target image of the image display device is generated, and the image data is displayed in the coordinate system of the sub image display device 5b indicating the display position of the target image of the sub image display device to be displayed on the sub image display device 5b. It designates and outputs to the sub image display apparatus 5b. The sub image display device 5b displays an image corresponding to the image data input at the display position designated by the coordinates. The display control unit 123 displays the sub image to be displayed on the sub image display device 5c based on the coordinates in the coordinate system of one image indicating the display position of the target image to be displayed on the sub image display device 5c. Image data corresponding to the device target image is generated, and the image data is designated in the coordinate system of the sub image display device 5c indicating the display position of the sub image display device target image to be displayed on the sub image display device 5c. To the sub-image display device 5c. The sub image display device 5c displays an image corresponding to the image data input at the display position designated by the coordinates. The display control unit 123 displays the sub image to be displayed on the sub image display device 5d based on the coordinates in the coordinate system of one image indicating the display position of the sub image display device target image to be displayed on the sub image display device 5d. Image data corresponding to the device target image is generated, and the image data is designated in the coordinate system of the sub image display device 5d indicating the display position of the sub image display device target image to be displayed on the sub image display device 5d. To the sub image display device 5d. The sub-image display device 5d displays an image corresponding to the image data input at the display position specified by the coordinates.

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the sub image display device mode table shown in FIG. 35 to control the lighting / extinguishing of the LEDs 90 arranged at the edges 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d ( Step S757). Specifically, the CPU 120 for effect control is associated with the coordinates of the four corners of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d specified in the process of step S754 with reference to the sub image display device mode table shown in FIG. Based on the LEDs 90 arranged at the edges 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d to be turned off, the corresponding LEDs 90 are turned off and the other LEDs 90 are turned on. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 restricts the lighting of the LEDs 90 arranged on the edges 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d during execution of the synchronous display effect.

  After executing the process of step S757, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the synchronized display effect executing flag to ON (step S758), and ends the synchronized display effect process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the synchronous display effect execution flag is on (step S750; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the movement of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d is completed (step S760). ). For example, as in step S703 of FIG. 34, the time when the first stepping motor is driven in accordance with one pulse power that is a drive control signal and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d move linearly by a predetermined distance, and the drive control signal The time during which the second stepping motor is driven according to one pulse power and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d rotate by a predetermined rotation amount is fixed. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 multiplies the predetermined number of pulse power outputs corresponding to the first stepping motor by the time during which the sub image display devices 5a to 5d move linearly according to one pulse power. When the time has elapsed and the number of output of pulse power corresponding to the predetermined second stepping motor is multiplied by the time for which the sub image display devices 5a to 5d rotate according to one pulse power, It is determined that the movement of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d has been completed. Otherwise, it is determined that the movement of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d has not been completed.

  When it is determined that the movement of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d has not ended (step S760; No), the effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S752. On the other hand, when it is determined that the movement of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d has ended (step S760; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether it is the end timing of the synchronous display effect (step S761). For example, the effect control CPU 120 measures the elapsed time from the start of the synchronous display effect, and synchronizes at the timing when the measurement time reaches the time of the synchronous display effect corresponding to the effect control pattern, as in step S726 of FIG. It is determined that it is the end timing of the display effect.

  If it is determined that it is not the end timing of the synchronized display effect (step S761; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the synchronized display effect process. On the other hand, when it determines with it being the completion | finish timing of a synchronous display effect (step S761; Yes), CPU120 for effect control performs completion | finish control of a synchronous display effect (step S762). For example, the effect control CPU 120 sends an output end command of the image of the synchronous display effect to the display control unit 123, as in step S712 of FIG. The display control unit 123 controls the display end of one image in the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d in response to the output end command. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 outputs to the lamp control board 14 an electrical decoration signal for turning off the LEDs 90 arranged at the edges 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. The illumination of the 5d edge portions 55a to 55d is terminated. The effect control CPU 120 generates a drive control signal for returning the position of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d to the initial position, and outputs the drive control signal to the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. The motor drive circuits mounted on the sub-image display devices 5a to 5d drive the first stepping motor and the second stepping motor in accordance with the drive control signal, so that the sub-image display devices 5a to 5d are in the initial state positions. Move.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the synchronous display effect executing flag to OFF (step S763).

  42 to 45 are diagrams showing an example of image display in the synchronous display effect process in the variable display effect process. In the synchronized effect display process, the sub image display devices 5a to 5d move and rotate, and are superimposed on the entire main image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 45 from the state shown in FIG. 42 to the state shown in FIG. It becomes a state. In the mode shown in FIG. 45, as shown in FIG. 12 described above, the south pole of the magnet of one sub-image display device 5a-5d is opposite to the north pole of the magnet of another sub-image display device 5a-5d in contact. Then, the N pole of the magnet of one sub image display device 5a to 5d is opposed to the S pole of the magnet of another sub image display device 5a to 5d that is in contact, and is in contact with one sub image display device 5a to 5d. The contact state with the other sub image display devices 5a to 5d is maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 42, the main image display device target image 551 to be displayed on the main image display device 5 among the one image is displayed on the main image display device 5 and the sub image to be displayed on the sub image display device 5a. The display device target image 551a is displayed on the sub image display device 5a, the sub image display device target image 551b to be displayed on the sub image display device 5b is displayed on the sub image display device 5b, and should be displayed on the sub image display device 5c. The sub image display device target image 551c is displayed on the sub image display device 5c, and the sub image display device target image 551d to be displayed on the sub image display device 5d is displayed on the sub image display device 5d. As a result, the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d have one main image display device target image 551 and sub image display device target images 551a to 551d that are continuous with each other as effect images related to each other. An image is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 42, one image includes a character image imitating “crab” (hereinafter referred to as “crab image”) and object images imitating “crab” and “chestnut” (hereinafter referred to as “crab image”, respectively). ”And“ chestnut image ”), and is divided and displayed on the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. On the main image display device 5, the main part of the crab image is mainly displayed as the main image display device target image 551. The sub image display device 5a mainly displays the right claw portion of the crab image as the sub image display device target image 551a. In the sub image display device 5b, the left nail portion of the crab image is mainly displayed as the sub image display device target image 551b. On the sub-image display device 5c, a cocoon image is mainly displayed as the sub-image display device target image 551c. A chestnut image is mainly displayed as the sub image display device target image 551d on the sub image display device 5d.

  Here, the case where the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d display effect images that are continuous with each other as effect images that are associated with each other, for example, as shown in FIG. The line displayed on the device 5 is displayed as a line connected to the sub image display devices 5a to 5d via the edge portions 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d adjacent to the edge portion of the main image display device 5. Indicates that In addition, when the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d display effect images that are continuous with each other, displaying images of the same color or similar colors is also included.

  That is, when the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d display effect images that are continuous with each other as effect images that are related to each other, the image that is stored as one image data It shows that a part is displayed on the main image display device 5 and the other part is divided and displayed on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d.

  At this time, of the edge portions 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, a portion that interferes with the main image display device target image 551 displayed by the main image display device 5, that is, the main image display device target image 551 and each The LEDs arranged in the part (part of the edge) separating visual continuity from the sub-image display device target images 551a to 551d are turned off. On the other hand, the LEDs 90 other than the portion that interferes with the main image display device target image 551 displayed by the main image display device 5 are lit. Here, in the edge portions 55a to 55d, the hatched portion indicates that the LED is turned on, and the hatched portion indicates that the LED is turned off.

  Here, the mode of turning on / off the LED 90 will be described more specifically. FIG. 43 shows a mode of turning on / off the LED 90 in the adjacent portion bbb between the main image display device 5 and the sub image display device 5b in FIG. As shown in FIG. 43, the LEDs 90d5 to 90d9 and 90r7 are visual indicators of the main image display device target image 551 displayed by the main image display device 5 and the sub image display device target image 551b displayed by the sub image display device 5b. Since it is arranged in a part separating continuity (a part of the edge), it is in a light-off state. On the other hand, the LEDs 90d4 and 90r4 to 90r6 are in a lit state because they are not arranged in a portion that separates the visual continuity between the main image display device target image 551 and the sub image display device target image 551b. In this way, by turning off the LEDs arranged in the portions that separate the visual continuity of the images displayed by the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 55a to 55d, the portions are made inconspicuous. A reduction in visibility can be prevented. In order to prevent the sub image display device target images 551a to 551d displayed on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d from being unnaturally interrupted, according to the sub image display device target images 551a to 551d, The LEDs 90 arranged outside the portion that separates the visual continuity from the main image display device target image 551 may be turned off. For example, the image of the left nail part of the crab image of the sub-image display device target image 551b displayed on the sub-image display device 5b shown in FIG. Alternatively, these may be turned off.

  As shown in FIG. 44, thereafter, the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are in a state of being superimposed on a part of the main image display device 5 by moving and rotating. At this time, the sub image display device target image 551a to be displayed on the sub image display device 5a, the sub image display device target image 551b to be displayed on the sub image display device 5b, and the sub image display device to be displayed on the sub image display device 5c. The target image 551c and the sub image display device target image 551d to be displayed on the sub image display device 5d change. It should be noted that sub-image display displayed on each of the sub-image display devices 5a to 5d also in a portion of the display area of the main image display device 5 that is superposed by the sub-image display devices 5a to 5d and hidden on the appearance. The same images as the device target images 551a to 551d may be displayed.

  In addition, with the movement and rotation of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, the manner in which the LEDs 90 arranged on the edges 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are turned on and off changes. Of the edge portions 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, a portion that interferes with the main image display device target image 551 displayed by the main image display device 5, that is, the main image display device target image 551 and each sub image display. The LEDs arranged in the part (part of the edge) separating the visual continuity from the device target images 551a to 551d are turned off. On the other hand, the LEDs 90 other than the portion that interferes with the main image display device target image 551 displayed by the main image display device 5 are lit.

  As the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are further moved and rotated, as shown in FIG. 45, the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are superposed on the entire main image display device 5, that is, adjacent to each other. It becomes a state. In this case, the entire main image display device target image 551 displayed on the main image display device 5 is the sub image display device target image 551a to be displayed on the sub image display device 5a and the sub image display device 5b. The image display device target image 551b, the sub image display device target image 551c to be displayed on the sub image display device 5c, and the sub image display device target image 551d to be displayed on the sub image display device 5d are displayed in association with each other.

  In addition, when the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are adjacent to each other, the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are arranged in portions of the edge portions 55a to 55d that do not face the other sub image display devices 5a to 5d. The LED 90 is turned on, and the LED 90 disposed in a portion facing the other sub image display devices 5a to 5d is turned off.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, for example, when the CPU 120 for effect control receives a predetermined effect control command as shown in the flowchart of the command analysis process of FIG. The display initialization command for initializing the display state of each of the liquid crystal panels 401a to 401d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d is divided and serially transmitted to the display drivers 402a to 402d. Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the malfunction of an effect display can be suppressed. In addition, by dividing and transmitting the display initialization command, the processing load is distributed, and it is possible to prevent other processes from being executed due to the transmission of the display initialization command.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment, for example, the effect control CPU 120 receives a predetermined effect control command received from the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. Based on this, settings and processing corresponding to each are executed. Thereby, the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a whole can be controlled by using the transmission timing of the display initialization command triggered by the reception of the command from the main board side.

  In addition, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment, for example, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation received from the CPU 130 of the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in the flowchart of the command analysis processing in FIG. Based on the command, the command after the round opening, etc., the effect control CPU 120 transmits the display initialization command to the display drivers 402a to 402d in a divided manner. Thereby, the initialization of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d can be executed at the timing according to the control on the main board side.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment, for example, at least after the variable display result is derived and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the main image display device 5, or in the big hit control state After one of the round games in which the special winning opening device 7 is controlled to be in the open state by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, the display initialization command is dividedly transmitted to the display control means. As a result, it is possible to prevent another process from being executed due to the transmission of the display initialization command.

  In addition, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, for example, the production control CPU 120, as shown in the flowchart of the command analysis processing in FIG. 25, when dark display is executed while the demonstration movie is displayed. Resets the sub image display devices 5a to 5d by hardware, transmits a reset signal to each of the liquid crystal control boards 400a to 400d, and then causes the VDP 362 to transmit a display-on command. Thereby, the display state of each of the liquid crystal panels 401a to 401d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d can be initialized without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, for example, the liquid crystal control boards 400a to 400d mounted on the sub image display apparatuses 5a to 5d are sub image display apparatuses according to the data signal acquired from the signal separation board 220. The display images 5a to 5d are controlled. Further, the signal separation substrate 220 and the liquid crystal control substrates 400a to 400d are connected by a harness 600 having a line structure with signal lines 610, 612, and 614. Further, a varistor 460 for noise suppression, a capacitor 462, bidirectional Zener diodes 464 and 466, ferrite beads 468 and 470, a capacitor 472, and a bidirectional Zener diode 474 are connected to signal lines in the liquid crystal control boards 400a to 400d. ing. Thereby, the noise countermeasures of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d can be strengthened.

  In addition, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in the flowchart of the command analysis process in FIG. 25, the effect control CPU 120 receives a customer waiting demo command as an effect control command. When dark display is executed during display of the demonstration screen, reset signals are output to the display drivers 402a to 2d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. Thereby, the display drivers 402a to 402d can appropriately perform display driving, and can suppress the occurrence of defects in the effect display.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment, for example, the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are provided as display means for effect images. In addition, the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are moved by driving the first stepping motor and the second stepping motor. This makes it possible to produce an effect using two types of display means and enhance the effect of the effect.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, when a customer waiting demonstration command is received as an effect control command, a reset signal is output to each of the display drivers 402a to 402d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. The display settings of the liquid crystal panels 401a to 401d are initialized. According to this, the display state of the liquid crystal panel (display panel) can be initialized without hindering the progress of the game.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 transmits a display-on command to each of the display drivers 402, 402a to 402d by serial communication in which the clock frequency is a specific frequency. Then, the CPU 120 for effect control lowers the serial communication clock frequency to a non-transmission frequency lower than the specific frequency after transmitting the display-on command.

In this way, the display control CPU 120 sends a display-on command to each display driver 402, 402a to 402d by serial communication in which the clock frequency is lower than a specific frequency (for example, a frequency during non-transmission). The time required to control the backlight (LED) of the liquid crystal panel to the display-on state is less than that of the pachinko gaming machine to be transmitted. Specifically, when the specific frequency is set to 795 kHz, the control time for turning on the display when the display on command is transmitted at 500 kHz lower than the specific frequency is about 6.5 seconds. When a display on command is transmitted at a frequency (795 kHz), the control time for turning on the display is about 1.5 seconds, and the time is shortened by about 5 seconds.
In addition, in this way, after the display-on command is transmitted, the generation of high-frequency radio waves received by other devices such as a wireless terminal than a pachinko gaming machine that does not lower the serial communication clock frequency below a specific frequency. This reduces the output of noise in other devices. As a result, the generation of radio waves received by other devices is reduced while reducing the time required for control.

In addition, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 sets the serial communication clock frequency to a specific frequency when the power is turned on as a specific condition or when demo switching is started. In particular, the effect control CPU 120 changes the clock frequency of serial communication to a specific frequency after transmitting a reset signal before starting demo switching.
By doing this, the serial communication clock frequency is not set to the specific frequency when it is not necessary to set the serial communication clock frequency to the specific frequency as in the game before the start of the demo switch. The generation of high-frequency radio waves received by other devices than the pachinko gaming machine in which is set to a specific frequency is reduced.

In addition, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines when the serial communication clock frequency is changed from the non-transmission frequency to the specific frequency after transmitting the reset signal before starting the demo switching. The transmission of the display-on command is started after 1 second has elapsed as a predetermined time after the change to the frequency.
By doing so, the clock signal at the time of serial communication is stabilized, so the display-on command is more effective than a pachinko machine that does not start sending the display-on command after 1 second has elapsed since the change to the specific frequency. The accuracy of sending is improved.
In this embodiment, the display on command transmission is started after one second has elapsed after changing to the specific frequency. For example, when the frequency is changed to the specific frequency, the serial communication flag is set to the off state, The transmission of the display on command may be started after the communication flag is changed to the on state. In this case, it is necessary to separately provide a process for setting the timer to 1 second when the serial communication flag is set to OFF in parallel with the display ON command transmission process and setting the serial communication flag to ON after 1 second has elapsed. There is.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment, when the CPU 120 for effect control changes the clock frequency of serial communication from a specific frequency to a non-transmission frequency after transmitting the display-on command, the non-transmission frequency Serial communication is restricted until 1 second has elapsed since the change to.
By doing so, the clock signal at the time of serial communication becomes stable, so serial communication is more effective than pachinko machines that do not resume serial communication after 1 second has elapsed since the change to non-transmission frequency. Accuracy is improved.
In the present embodiment, the on / off of the serial communication flag is controlled in the display on command transmission process shown in FIG. 29. However, for example, the process may be terminated by setting the serial communication flag to off. In this case, it is necessary to separately provide a process for setting the timer to 1 second when the serial communication flag is set to OFF in parallel with the display ON command transmission process and setting the serial communication flag to ON after 1 second has elapsed. There is.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment, the effect control board 12 includes the motor drive circuit 16 for driving the movable effect member motor 61, the first stepping motor, and the second stepping motor. Are connected by a serial communication line. Then, the effect control CPU 120 transmits a drive control command to each motor drive circuit at a frequency lower than the specific frequency (frequency at the time of non-transmission) during a game different from when the power is turned on or when demo switching is started.

  In this way, an excessive communication speed for each motor drive circuit compared to a pachinko machine that does not transmit a drive control command to each motor drive circuit by serial communication with a clock frequency lower than a specific frequency. Thus, the transmission of the drive control command is reduced. In addition, since a drive control command is transmitted to each motor drive circuit at a time different from the time when the display-on command is transmitted to each display driver 402, 402a to 402d, a clock is supplied to each motor drive circuit. It is possible to prevent the drive control command from being transmitted by serial communication in which the frequency becomes a specific frequency. In addition, the generation of high-frequency radio waves received by other devices than the pachinko gaming machine that transmits data to each motor drive circuit by serial communication with a clock frequency of a specific frequency is reduced.

In particular, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, each of the image display devices 5 and 5a to 5d includes the liquid crystal panels 401 and 401a to 401d and the display drivers 402 and 402a to 402d. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 transmits a display-on command to the display drivers 402 and 402a to 402d through serial communication via the display control unit 123 including the VDP 362. The display drivers 402 and 402a to 402d turn on the liquid crystal panels 401 and 401a to 401d when the display on command is input.
In this way, when the effect is actually displayed, the liquid crystal panels 401, 401a to 401d are in the display-on state, and the effect can be displayed suitably.

In addition, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 transmits a display-on command by serial communication via the display control unit 123 having the VDP 362 and then switches to the next demonstration during the game. Send display on command again at start.
In this way, even if the state of the liquid crystal panels 401, 401a to 401d changes after the display on command is transmitted, the display on command is transmitted again. Therefore, the display panel is displayed again at the start of the next demo switching. Can be turned on.

  As described above, the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings. However, specific configurations are not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions without departing from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. It is.

  In the above embodiment, the display control unit 123 of the effect control board 12 and the liquid crystal control boards 400 and 400a to 400d of the image display devices 5 and 5a to 5d are connected by serial signal lines (signal line groups 128, 129a to 129d, etc.). The sub image display devices 5a to 5d are connected by serial signal lines with the signal separation board 200 interposed therebetween, but the display control unit 123 and the liquid crystal control boards 400 and 400a are connected by the serial signal lines. For example, the effect control unit 126 including the effect control CPU 120 and the liquid crystal control boards 400 and 400a to 400d may be connected by serial signal lines. In this way, the display control unit 123 can be omitted. In this case, a CPU general-purpose serial output terminal may be provided on the effect control CPU 120 side, and the effect control CPU 120 and the liquid crystal control boards 400, 400a to 400d may be directly connected by a serial signal line. In this case, the effect control unit 126 may be provided with a serial conversion IC having a serial output terminal, and the effect control CPU 120 and the liquid crystal control boards 400 and 400a to 400d may be indirectly connected via the serial conversion IC. Good.

  In the above embodiment, the serial communication clock frequency is changed to the specific frequency when the display-on command is transmitted to the display drivers 402 and 402a to 402d, but the timing for changing the serial communication clock frequency to the specific frequency is this. For example, when a display off command is transmitted to the display drivers 402 and 402a to 402d, the frequency may be changed to a specific frequency.

  In the above-described embodiment, the image display devices 5 and 5a to 5d including the display drivers 402 and 402a to 402d are illustrated as an example of a receiving unit that changes the clock frequency during serial communication to a specific frequency. Alternatively, the reception control CPU 120 may be other receiving means that can be controlled by serial communication. For example, the above-described stepping motor, other movable members for the role, each button for performance, an external communication device capable of serial communication with the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like may be used. In this case, for example, for each effect button, the serial communication clock frequency may be changed to a specific frequency after an effect that prompts the user to operate the button is executed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the image display devices 5 and 5a to 5d including the display drivers 402 and 402a to 402d are illustrated as an example of a receiving unit that changes the clock frequency during serial communication to a specific frequency. Alternatively, the reception control CPU 120 may be other receiving means that can be controlled by serial communication. For example, serial communication is possible with the above-described stepping motor, a plurality of LEDs 90 (90u1 to 90u9, 90d1 to 90d9, 9011 to 90l7, 90r1 to 90r7), other movable members, buttons for presentation, pachinko gaming machine 1 An external communication device or the like may be used. In this case, for example, for each effect button, the serial communication clock frequency may be changed to a specific frequency after an effect that prompts the user to operate the button is executed.

  In the above embodiment, the specific condition is exemplified when the power is turned on or when demo switching is started. For example, if the model is initialized to the display-on state only when the power is turned on, the specific condition may be set only when the power is turned on. . In this case, only when the power is turned on, the display-on command is transmitted by serial communication at a specific frequency, and for serial communication after lowering the clock frequency, each command is executed at a frequency lower than the specific frequency paper (frequency at the time of non-transmission). Will be sent.

  In the above embodiment, power-on or demo switching start is exemplified as the specific condition. However, the specific condition is not limited to this, and for example, a specific effect (a big hit state or a small hit state effect, a reach effect, a demonstration) It may be a so-called clear timing such as the start or end of a production or the like. In this case, as in this embodiment, when the display signal is transmitted after the reset signal is transmitted, that is, when the display is turned on after the dark display is performed and the effect is started, switching from the dark display is performed. It is preferable to design in advance so as to produce a feeling without discomfort.

  In the above-described embodiment, as a predetermined timing for transmitting a display initialization command for initializing the display state of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, when a symbol confirmation designation command or a command after opening a big prize opening is received, etc. Explained in the example. However, the timing for transmitting the display initialization command may be any timing as long as the processing load on each of the liquid crystal control boards 400a to 400d and each of the display drivers 402a to 402d is light, regardless of whether there is an abnormality such as an effect display. It may be when the effect display such as after the big hit end process is switched. In addition to the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, a display initialization command may be transmitted to the main image display device 5 to initialize it. At that time, the effect control CPU 120 may transmit the display initialization command in a batch or may transmit them individually. Furthermore, the display state of the main image display device 5 or the like may be initialized by transmitting a display initialization command periodically (for example, every 30 minutes) without triggering the occurrence of an event such as reception of an effect control command.

  In the said embodiment, although the connection state of the production | presentation control board | substrate 12, the signal separation board | substrate 220, and the sub image display apparatuses 5a-5d was demonstrated with reference to FIG. 5, a connection state is not limited to this. For example, a signal line for connecting the effect control board 12 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d without providing the signal separation board 220 is provided, and control signals and the like are individually sent to the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. It may be transmitted. Further, a signal line that connects the effect control board 12 and the main image display device 5 may be provided and used as a transmission path for directly transmitting a control signal or the like to the main image display device 5.

  In the above embodiment, when transmitting the display-on command after transmitting the reset signal, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a transmission command instructing the VDP 362 to transmit the display-on command, and inputs this transmission command. The VDP 362 generates a display-on command and transmits it to the sub-image display devices 5a to 5d. However, transmission / reception of the transmission command between the effect control CPU 120 and the VDP 362 is omitted. For example, when the reset signal is transmitted from the effect control CPU 120, the VDP 362 issues a display on command at a predetermined timing. It may be generated and transmitted to the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. Further, the effect control CPU 120 may generate a display-on command after transmitting the reset signal, and transmit it to the sub-image display devices 5a to 5d.

  In the above embodiment, the display-on command is transmitted as information for permitting display to the display drivers 402a to 402d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. However, for example, a display-on signal that permits display to the display drivers 402a to 402d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d is transmitted between the effect control board 12, the signal separation board 220, and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. A dedicated line may be provided, and a display-on signal may be transmitted from the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 or the VDP 362 to the display drivers 402a to 402d.

  In the above embodiment, the display initialization command divided and transmitted from the effect control CPU 120 is transmitted to the sub image display devices 5a to 5d via the signal separation board 220, and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are collectively processed. Is initialized. However, the display initialization command may be separately transmitted to each of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d to be initialized. In addition, the display initialization command may be initialized individually or collectively including not only the sub image display devices 5a to 5d but also the main image display device 5.

  In the above embodiment, the reset signal output from the effect control CPU 120 is transmitted to the sub image display devices 5a to 5d through the signal separation substrate 220, and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are collectively initialized. It becomes. However, initialization may be performed by individually transmitting a reset signal to each of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. Further, it may be initialized by transmitting a reset signal individually or collectively including not only the sub image display devices 5a to 5d but also the main image display device 5. Accordingly, when the reset signal is transmitted in a batch, the display on command is transmitted in a batch to the image display device to which the reset signal is transmitted, and when the reset signal is transmitted individually. May be individually transmitted to the image display apparatus to which the reset signal is transmitted.

  In the above embodiment, when the demonstration control command is received from the game control microcomputer 100 as the predetermined timing at which the effect control CPU 120 transmits a reset signal for hardware resetting the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. Was described as an example. However, the timing for transmitting the reset signal is not limited to this. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may transmit the reset signal when the power consumption mode is set to the energy saving mode. The power consumption mode can be switched between a normal mode in which power consumption is not suppressed and an energy saving mode in which power consumption is reduced compared to the normal mode by a switch operation of a game hall administrator. . When the normal mode is set, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices such as the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 with normal power consumption and executes various effects. On the other hand, when the energy saving mode is set, the CPU 120 for effect control reduces the power consumption by lowering or muting the output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, and configures the game effect lamp 9. By turning off some or all of the LEDs, the power consumption is controlled to be controlled, and a simplified effect is executed. Note that whether the power consumption mode is set to the normal mode or the energy saving mode may be stored in the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12.

  In addition, when the power consumption mode is switched from the normal mode to the energy saving mode by a switch operation or the like of the game hall administrator, the effect control CPU 120 is provided on condition that the customer waiting demonstration command reception flag is not set. Then, the processes of steps S614 to S615 in the flowchart of the command analysis process of FIG. 25 are executed to initialize the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. Further, during the period from when the power consumption mode is set to the energy saving mode to when the power consumption mode is switched to the normal mode, the above-described steps S614 to S615 are executed every predetermined time (for example, 30 minutes) to display the sub image. The devices 5a to 5d may be initialized.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of the command analysis process in FIG. 25, the effect control CPU 120 controls the sub image display devices 5 a to 5 d according to the type of the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 100. In order to initialize the display state, a display initialization command or a reset signal is transmitted to the display drivers 402a to 402d. However, the VDP 362 may transmit a display initialization command or a reset signal. Further, as a means for initializing the display state of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, the effect control CPU 120 or the DVP 362 may transmit only one of the display initialization command and the reset signal.

  In the said embodiment, the sub image display apparatuses 5a-5d were moved and rotated during each execution of a message production | presentation, a sub image production, and a synchronous display production, and the position aspect was changed. However, the timing for moving and rotating the sub-image display devices 5a to 5d is not limited to during the execution of these notice effects. The movement and rotation of the image display devices 5a to 5d may be started, and the position modes of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d may be changed during the execution period of these effects and the like.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, all LED90 arrange | positioned at edge part 55a-55d of sub image display apparatus 5a-5d was made to light during execution of a message effect and a sub image effect. On the other hand, during execution of the synchronized display effect, the main image display device target image 551 displayed by the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d among the edges 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. The LED 90 arranged in the part separating visual continuity from the sub-image display device target images 551a to 551d displayed by 5d is turned off, and the LED 90 arranged in the other part is turned on. However, the lighting / extinguishing control of the LEDs 90 arranged at the edge portions 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d is not limited to this. Therefore, some or all of the LEDs 90 may be turned off. In the above embodiment, during the execution of the synchronized display effect, the LED 90 is turned on / off uniformly in all the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. However, the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are separately provided. You may make it control lighting / extinction of LED90. Further, the control of the LED 90 is not limited to lighting / extinguishing, for example, lighting with high or low luminance, or a conspicuous color or the main image display device target image 551 and the sub image display device target images 551a to 551d, or The LED 90 may be controlled by turning on or blinking in an inconspicuous color.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when performing LED90 arrange | positioned at the edge parts 55a-55d of sub image display apparatus 5a-5d during execution of a synchronous display effect on / off, it is the same in all the sub image display apparatuses 5a-5d. Turned on / off at the timing. However, the timing of turning on / off the LED 90 is, for example, a time interval (for example, 1 second) clockwise in the order of the sub image display device 5a, the sub image display device 5b, the sub image display device 5d, and the sub image display device 5c. It may be turned on / off after putting on. In this manner, for example, the possibility of performing the super reach effect may be notified by shifting the timing of turning on / off the LED 90 for each of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when performing a synchronous display effect, among the edge parts 55a-55d of the sub image display apparatuses 5a-5d, the main image display apparatus target image 551 which each main image display apparatus 5 displays, and each The LEDs 90 arranged in the portions separating the visual continuity from the sub image display device target images 551a to 551d displayed by the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are turned off. However, although the LEDs 90 arranged at the edge portions 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are turned off, a so-called gas effect such as not performing the synchronous display effect may be executed.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, as shown to FIG. 42 and FIG. 43, lighting / extinguishing of LED90 arrange | positioned at the part was controlled for every part of edge part 55a-55d of sub image display apparatus 5a-5d. However, for each side of the edge portions 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, lighting / extinguishing of the plurality of LEDs 90 arranged on the sides may be controlled. For example, it is arranged on the lower side (the side where LEDs 90d4 to 90d9 are arranged in FIG. 43) and the right side (the side where 90r4 to 90r7 are arranged in FIG. 43), respectively, of the edge 55b of the sub image display device 5b shown in FIG. The LEDs 90d1 to 90d9 and the LEDs 90r1 to 90r7 may be turned off, and the LEDs 90u1 to 90u9 and the LEDs 90l1 to 90l7 arranged on the upper side and the left side may be turned on. In this way, it is possible to suppress the troublesomeness caused by the LED 90 being turned on / off changing at any time while the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are moving and rotating. Further, the main image display device target image 551 displayed by the main image display device 5 and the sub image display device target images 551a to 551d displayed by the sub image display devices 5a to 5d appear to be unnaturally interrupted. Can be prevented.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38, in the sub image production | presentation, the example which displays a reserved memory image on the sub image display apparatus 5d was demonstrated. However, for example, by setting the upper limit value (for example, “4”) of the reserved storage number to the same value as the number of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, each of the reserved memories is assigned to each of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. It is also possible to perform a hold notice effect (pre-read notice effect) for notifying that a big hit or reach will be achieved before the decorative symbol variable display is executed. In this case, an RGB full color LED or the like is arranged on the edge portions 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, and the emission color of the edge portions 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d is changed. A notice may be made. Similarly, the effect image displayed on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d and the light emission color of the edge portions 55a to 55d may be changed to display, for example, a reach effect or an image related to the big hit gaming state.

  Further, in the above embodiment, as a countermeasure for suppressing noise in the display image, the signal separation substrate 220 and the liquid crystal control substrates 400a to 400d mounted on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are connected to the signal lines 610, 612, and 614. The signal lines in the liquid crystal control boards 400a to 400d are connected by a harness 600 having a structure, and the noise suppression varistor 460, capacitor 462, bidirectional Zener diodes 464 and 466, ferrite beads 468 and 470, capacitor 472, bidirectional A zener diode 474 was connected. However, the noise suppression measure for the display image is not limited to this, and for example, a part of the signal line connecting the effect control board 12 and the signal separation board 220 is passed through a cylindrical ferrite bead for noise suppression. It may be. Further, a part of the signal line connecting the signal separation substrate 220 and the liquid crystal control substrates 400a to 400d may be passed through a cylindrical ferrite bead for noise suppression.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when performing a synchronous display effect, in FIG.42, FIG.44, FIG.45 as an example which the main image display apparatus 5 and the sub image display apparatuses 5a-5d display the related image mutually. As shown, one image is divided into the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d to display a continuous effect image, or one image is divided into the main sub image display devices 5a to 5d. A case where a continuous effect image is displayed has been described. However, the case where the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d display effect images related to each other is not limited thereto. For example, images constituting a series of stories together with the main image display device target image 551 to be displayed on the main image display device 5, images associated with the main image display device target image 551, and the like are displayed as sub image display device target images 551a to 551a. 551d may be displayed on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. Further, an image displayed during execution of the predetermined effect process may be displayed on the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. Specifically, the character images of the characters A and B appearing in the battle effect displayed during the reach effect are displayed on the main image display device 5, and the background until both characters reach the battle are displayed as sub-images. You may make it display on apparatus 5a-5d in an expanded manner. Further, not only during the execution of the reach effect, but when the game state is a big hit game state, a probability change state, etc., images related to the character A and the character B are displayed on the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. You may make it do. Further, for example, as images associated with the character A, images representing different facial expressions and actions of the character A may be displayed on the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, respectively.

  Moreover, as a case where the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d display effect images related to each other, images for assisting the image displayed on the main image display device 5 are displayed on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. You may make it display. For example, a description regarding the character of the character image displayed on the main image display device 5 may be displayed on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. Moreover, you may display the image which shows the battle condition (life meter etc.) of the battle effect displayed on the main image display apparatus 5 on the sub image display apparatuses 5a-5d.

  Further, when the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d display effect images related to each other, the same image is displayed on the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. The case may include a case where the same or different images related to the image displayed on the main image display device 5 are displayed on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. In this case, in order to suggest the relevance of the effect image displayed on the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, it is arranged on the edges 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d to be noticed. The LED 90 may be turned on / off or the color of the emitted light may be appropriately changed. Further, during execution of the synchronous display effect, control may be performed such that all the LEDs 90 arranged on the edge portions 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are turned on or all are turned off.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36 and the like, the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are described as having the same shape, but each may have a different shape. Further, the number and arrangement positions of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are not limited to the example shown in FIG. 36 and the like. For example, the two sub image display devices 5a and 5b are connected to the main image display device 5 in the vertical and horizontal directions. You may arrange in a corner. Further, only one sub image display device 5a may be arranged, or no sub image display device may be arranged. Further, the sub image display devices 5 a to 5 d may be arranged in the vicinity of the main image display device 5 without being superimposed on the main image display device 5. Further, the sub image display devices 5a to 5d may be designed to be fixedly arranged at predetermined positions without moving or rotating.

  In the above embodiment, the message effect process and the synchronous display effect process are executed in the variable display effect process. However, the execution timing of the message effect process and the synchronous display effect process is not limited to this, and FIG. It may be executed in any of the processes of Step S170 to Step S176. Further, in the effect processing other than the message effect processing, the sub image display devices 5 a to 5 d may be moved to display images in the gap area of the main display device 5. Further, in the effect processing other than the message effect processing executed in the processes of steps S170 to S176 in FIG. 32, the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are moved to display images in the gap area of the main display device 5. You may do it. For example, the message effect process may be executed in a changing effect of a decorative pattern other than the reach effect, a demonstration other than the change effect, a big hit, a small hit effect, or the like. Similarly, in the effect processes other than the synchronous display effect process executed in the processes of steps S170 to S176 in FIG. 32, the main image display device 5 and the sub image display device 5a are moved by moving the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. Images with continuity (relevance) may be displayed. For example, the synchronous display effect process may be executed in a changing effect of a decorative pattern other than the reach effect, a demonstration other than the changing effect, a big hit, a small hit effect, or the like.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the sub-image effect that causes the sub-image display devices 5a to 5d to display the image that should originally be displayed on the main image display device 5 in the variable display effect process and the special opening normally open process. Although the process has been executed, the execution timing of the sub-image effect process is not limited to this, and may be executed in any of the processes in steps S170 to S176 in FIG. Further, in an effect process other than the sub image effect process, the sub image display devices 5a to 5d may display an image that should be originally displayed on the main image display device 5.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, as shown in FIG.34 and FIG.41, when a fluctuation pattern is PA2-3, PA2-5, PA3-3, PA3-5, a message effect process and a synchronous display effect process are always carried out. However, the message effect process and the synchronous display effect process may be executed even in other variation patterns. Further, for example, even if the variation pattern is PA2-3, PA2-5, PA3-3, PA3-5 using random numbers for setting whether or not to execute the message effect process and the synchronous display effect process, etc. The message effect process and the synchronous display effect process may not be executed with a predetermined probability.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37, in the variable display effect process, when the variation pattern is PA2-3, PA2-5, PA3-3, or PA3-5, the sub image is always displayed. Although the sub image effect process for displaying the image that should be originally displayed on the main image display device 5 is executed on the display devices 5a to 5d, the sub image effect process is also executed for other variation patterns. Also good. Further, for example, by using a random number for setting whether or not to execute the sub-image effect process, even if the variation pattern is PA2-3, PA2-5, PA3-3, PA3-5, with a predetermined probability The sub image effect process may not be executed. Similarly, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, in the special winning opening normal opening process, when the variation pattern is PA3-2, PA3-3, PA3-5, the sub image display device 5a. The sub-image effect process for displaying the image that should be displayed on the main image display device 5 is executed at ˜5d. May be executed. Further, for example, by using a random number for setting whether or not to execute the sub-image effect process, even if the variation pattern is PA3-1, PA3-2, PA3-3, PA3-5, with a predetermined probability The sub image effect process may not be executed. Furthermore, step S806 in FIG. 39 is not provided, so that the process of determining whether or not the sub image effect process can be executed based on the variation pattern is not performed, and the sub image effect process is always executed in the case of a normal big hit. May be.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although all the sub image display apparatuses 5a-5d were moved and the message effect process and the synchronous display effect process were performed, any one or more of the sub image display apparatuses 5a-5d are moved. Then, the message effect process and the synchronous display effect process may be executed.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36C, from the gap area between the sub image display device 5a and the sub image display device 5c in the gap area of the main image display device 5, the sub image is displayed. The selection instruction message image is displayed over the gap area between the display device 5b and the sub-image display apparatus 5d. However, the selection instruction message image is not limited to this, and the selection instruction message image is appropriately displayed in one or more gap areas. May be displayed. For example, in FIG. 36C, the gap region between the sub image display device 5a and the sub image display device 5b extends to the gap region between the sub image display device 5c and the sub image display device 5d. A selection instruction message image may be displayed.

  Further, the image displayed in the gap area of the main image display device 5 is not limited to the selection instruction message image described above, and may be an image of the remaining time that can be selected by the player, an image of the option itself, or the like.

  In addition, the images that should be displayed on the main image display device 5 that are originally displayed on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are the big hit mode image, the round number image, the number-of-balls image, the continuous number-of-changes image, It is not limited to a game mode image, a right-handed instruction image, a fourth symbol image, or a reserved storage image. For example, when a work having a story is used as a motif and the story progresses according to the number of consecutive channels, an image of a story corresponding to the number of consecutive channels, which is an image corresponding to the story, may be used. Also, an image that shows the number of all the balls in the chain, an image that shows how many times the decorative symbol has changed since the previous big hit, and that the current big hit is a promising big hit. It may be an image indicating whether or not.

  In the above-described embodiment, the main image display device and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are liquid crystal display devices having a built-in liquid crystal panel. The present invention can also be applied to a display device, a display device composed of organic EL (Electro Luminescence) or inorganic EL, a transmissive display device incorporating transmissive liquid crystal, and the like.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, CPU120 for effect control of the effect control board 12 demonstrated as what determines the control content of various effect operation | movement. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the control contents of various rendering operations are shared and determined by a plurality of CPUs respectively mounted on a plurality of control boards provided for controlling the rendering operations. You may do it.

  In the above embodiment, in order to notify the CPU 120 for effect control of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time and the type of reach effect, one change pattern command is transmitted when the change is started. The change pattern may be notified to the effect control CPU 120 by the above command. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the gaming control microcomputer 100 uses the first command to determine whether or not there is a pseudo-continuity, whether or not there is a slide effect, etc. After sending a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the so-called second stop and reaching the reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery with the second command (if it does not reach) You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect after what is called a 2nd stop. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. In the game control microcomputer 100, the change time is notified by each of the two commands, and the specific control mode executed at each timing is selected by the effect control microcomputer. Also good. When two commands are sent, the two commands may be transmitted within the same timer interrupt. After the first command is transmitted, a predetermined period elapses (for example, the next timer interrupt is transmitted). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. As described above, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  In addition to this, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, various rendering operations including the rendering operation of the rendering image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. Changes and modifications can be arbitrarily made without departing from the scope.

  In addition, in the gaming machine of the present invention, a game ball is paid out as a prize to the player, and the player launches the paid game ball (which may be a rental ball) into the game area to play a game. Although it was a gaming machine, a game score for use in a game is given using the number of game values having a size specified by the recording information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card. The present invention is also applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine using a given game score or a game score given by winning a game. Can do.

[Embodiment 2]
In the above embodiment, a specific communication frequency is set as the clock frequency for serial communication when a display-on command is transmitted to a pachinko machine that shoots a game ball as a game medium to the game area and variably displays special symbols and decorative symbols. In the above description, it is assumed that a configuration for lowering to a non-transmission frequency lower than a specific frequency after transmitting the display-on command is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration and functions that are features of the present invention can be applied to other gaming machines such as a slot machine.
The slot machine according to the second embodiment to which the configuration of the present invention is applied will be described below.

[Configuration of slot machine]
As shown in FIG. 46, the slot machine 1001 according to the present embodiment includes a housing 1001a having an open front surface and a front door 1001b pivotally supported on a side end of the housing 1001a. . The front door 1001b can open and close the opened front side of the housing 1001a by rotating with respect to the housing 1001a.

  As shown in FIG. 47, inside the casing 1001a of the slot machine 1001 of this embodiment, reels 1002L, 1002C, and 1002R (hereinafter, left reel, middle reel, right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery. 46) are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. 46, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 1002L, 1002C, and 1002R are provided on the front door 1001b. It is arranged so that it can be seen from.

  For example, “black 7”, “net 7”, “white 7”, “BAR”, “replay”, “watermelon”, “white cherry”, and “bell” are provided on the outer peripheries of the reels 1002L, 1002C, and 1002R. "A plurality of types of mutually distinguishable symbols such as" are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 1002L, 1002C, and 1002R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the perspective window 1003, respectively.

  The reels 1002L, 1002C, and 1002R are provided in correspondence with each other and are rotated by reel motors 1032L, 1032C, and 1032R (see FIG. 49), so that the symbols of the reels 1002L, 1002C, and 1002R are continuously provided in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 1002L, 1002C, and 1002R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 1003 as display results.

  Inside the reels 1002L, 1002C, and 1002R, reel sensors 1033L, 1033C, and 1033R that detect a reference position for each of the reels 1002L, 1002C, and 1002R, and a reel LED 1055 that irradiates the reels 1002L, 1002C, and 1002R from the back side. Is provided. The reel LED 1055 includes 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols of the reels 1002L, 1002C, and 1002R, and each symbol can be irradiated independently.

  A display area 1051a of a liquid crystal display 1051 (see FIG. 46) is disposed at a position on the front side (player side) of each reel 1002L, 1002C, 1002R of the front door 1b. The player can visually recognize the reels 1002L, 1002C, and 1002R through the transparent area 1051b and the transparent window 1003 corresponding to the transparent window 1003 of the display area 1051a.

  The front door 1001b has a medal insertion unit 1004 that can insert medals, a medal payout exit 1009 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player's own game value that can be used to set the number of bets). One bet switch 1005 that is operated when setting the bet number for one medal using, and the maximum bet number among the specified number of bets determined according to the gaming state within the range using credits A MAXBET switch 1006 that is operated when setting the bet number (in this embodiment, 2 when the game state is RB (BB), 3 in the normal game state), and the medal and bet number stored as credits A checkout switch 1010 operated when paying out the medals used for setting (returning medals used for setting credits and bets), A start switch 1007 that is operated when starting the game and stop switches 1008L, 1008C, and 1008R that are operated when stopping the rotation of the reels 1002L, 1002C, and 1002R are provided so as to be operable by the player. .

  In the present embodiment, a single BET switch 1005 and stop switches 1008L, 1008C, and 1008R are provided on the front surface, that is, on the same surface of the operation panel constituting the front door 1001b.

  The front door 1001b is provided with a player side setting switch 10070 for setting an effect mode during the game. Since the player side setting switch 1070 is provided on the front side of the front door 1001b (that is, outside the front door 1001b), the player side setting switch 1070 is located on the front side of the slot machine 1001 when the front door 1001b is closed. . For this reason, an operation from the outside, such as being operated by a player who plays in the slot machine 1001, is possible. The player can set the volume and light amount in the effect during the game by operating the player side setting switch 1070. Note that the player-side setting switch 1070 includes an LED inside, and can notify whether or not an operation is accepted by turning on and off. For example, by turning on the player side setting switch 1070, the player side setting switch 1070 notifies that the operation is accepted. Further, for example, by turning off the player-side setting switch 1070, the player-side setting switch 1070 notifies that the operation is not accepted.

  The front door 1001b has a credit indicator 1011 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, and the number of acquired medals in the BB and the occurrence of errors such as insertion of foreign objects other than regular medals into the medal insertion unit 1004. There is provided a game auxiliary display 1012 on which an error code indicating the contents is sometimes displayed.

  On the front door 1001b, 1BETLED 1014 that notifies that the bet number is set to 1 by lighting, 2BETLED 1015 that notifies that the bet number is set to 2, and 3 bets are set. A 3BET LED 1016 to notify by lighting, an insertion request LED 1017 to notify by virtue of a state where a medal can be inserted, a start valid LED 1018 to notify that the game start operation by operating the start switch 7 is effective, and a weight (Waiting to start reel rotation because a certain period has not elapsed since the start of the previous game) LED indicating that the game is in progress, and LED indicating that the replay game is in progress A replaying LED 1020 is provided. A replay game refers to a game that is started after the number of bets is automatically set.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 1006, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 for informing that the single bet switch 1005 and the MAXBET switch 1006 are operated for setting the betting number by lighting. Within the stop switches 1008L, 1008C, and 1008R, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 1022L, 1022C, and 1022R that notify that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 1008L, 1008C, and 1008R is effective are turned on. Is provided.

  Inside the front door 1001b, a reset switch 1023 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state and a stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until the reset operation is performed) by a predetermined key operation; There is provided a set value display 1024 for displaying the set value at that time while changing the set value or checking the set value.

  On the inner side of the front door 1001b, a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion portion 1004 is provided on either the hopper tank 1034a (see FIG. 47) side or the medal payout outlet 1009 side provided inside the casing 1001a. A flow path switching solenoid 1030 for selectively switching and a insertion medal sensor (disposed on the hopper tank 1034a side from the flow path switching solenoid 1030) for detecting a medal that has been inserted from the medal insertion unit 1004 and flowed down to the hopper tank 1034a side. A medal selector (not shown) is provided.

  Inside the front door 1001b, a store-side setting switch 1060 is provided for performing a setting that is a reference for the effect mode during the game. Since the store clerk owns the key for opening the front door 1001b, the store side setting switch 1060 can be operated from the outside by opening the front door 1001b. On the other hand, a person other than the store clerk such as a player cannot operate the store side setting switch 1060 because the front door 1001b cannot be opened. That is, the store side setting switch 1060 is an operating means for a game store where the slot machine 1001 is installed. The store clerk can perform setting that serves as a reference for the volume and the light amount in the effect during the game by operating the store side setting switch 1060.

  As shown in FIG. 48, the store side setting switch 1060 is a switch for switching a total of 16 channels from “0” to “F”. The store clerk can switch these channels by rotating the knob 1061. For each of the channels “0” to “F”, the volume and the amount of light in the production are divided into stages. The volume level corresponding to the channels “0” to “F” is referred to as a first volume level, and the light intensity level corresponding to the channels “0” to “F” is also referred to as a first light intensity level. For example, if the channel is “0”, the first volume level is set to the minimum volume level and the first light level level is set to the minimum volume level. If the channel is “F”, the first volume level set to the maximum volume level and the first light level level set to the maximum volume level are set.

  Note that the steps for the volume and the amount of light set by the store clerk based on the operation of the store-side setting switch 1060 are referred to as the first volume step and the first light amount step, whereas the player-side setting switch 1070 is operated. Therefore, the steps for the volume and the amount of light that can be set by the player are also referred to as a second volume step and a second light amount step.

  Inside the housing 1001a, reels 1002L, 1002C, and 1002R, reel motors 1032L, 1032C, and 1032R, and reel sensors 1033L, 1033C, and 1033R that can detect the reel reference positions of the reels 1002L, 1002C, and 1002R, respectively (see FIG. 49) is provided. Inside the housing 1001a, an external output board 2000 for outputting an external output signal, a hopper tank 1034a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 1004, and medal payment for medals stored in the hopper tank 1034a A hopper unit 1034 including a hopper motor 1034b for paying out from the outlet 1009 and a payout sensor 1034c for detecting a medal paid out by driving the hopper motor 1034b is provided.

  An overflow tank 1035 for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 1034a is provided on the side of the hopper unit 1034. Inside the overflow tank 1035, a full sensor 1035a made up of a pair of conductive members spaced from each other and provided at a height capable of detecting a predetermined amount of stored medals is provided. The full tank sensor 1035a indicates that the amount of stored medal stored in the interior when the conductive member is brought into contact with the medal stored in the overflow tank 1035 exceeds a predetermined amount, that is, the overflow tank is full. Detects that it is in a tan state.

  A power supply box 1100 is provided inside the housing 1001a. On the front surface of the power supply box 1100, a stop function that controls to a stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at the end of BB or AT (assist time) is enabled / disabled. A stop switch 1036a for selection is provided. The AT is a period during which a navigation effect is performed in which the player is notified of the pressing order of the stop switches 1008L, 1008C, and 1008R in order to generate a predetermined winning. It is controlled by AT on the condition that it has Navistock which is the right of AT control. The AT is controlled over a predetermined number of games (one set of 50 games in this embodiment) based on the number of navigation stocks held. For this reason, the number of navigation stocks indicates the number of rights controlled by the AT, and as the number of navigation stocks increases, the number of navigation stocks is controlled by the AT for a longer period.

  Further, on the front surface of the power supply box 1100, an automatic settlement function for controlling automatic settlement processing (processing to settle (return) medals stored as credits regardless of player operations) at the end of the BB is enabled / disabled. An automatic settlement switch 1036b for selecting, a setting key switch 1037 for switching to a setting change state and a setting confirmation state at power-on (startup), and for canceling an error state or a stop state in normal times The reset / setting switch 1038 that functions as a reset switch and functions as a setting switch for changing the setting value of the winning probability (payout rate) of the internal lottery in the setting change state, and is operated when the power is turned ON / OFF A power switch 1039 is provided.

The power box 1100 is equipped with a setting key switch 1037, a reset / setting switch 1038, and a power switch 1039 that are operated when changing the setting value.
The store clerk can operate the setting key switch 1037 from the outside by opening the front door 1001b. On the other hand, a person other than the store clerk such as a player cannot operate the setting key switch 1037 because the front door 1001b cannot be opened. That is, the setting key switch 1037 is an operation means for a game store where the slot machine 1001 is installed.

  A door opening detection switch 1025 for detecting opening / closing of the front door 1001b is provided at an upper position on the side surface facing the side surface on which the power supply box 1100 is provided. The door opening detection switch 1025 is in an ON state when the front door 1001b closes the front side where the housing 1001a is opened, while the front door 1001b opens the front side where the housing 1001a is opened. When it is in the OFF state.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1001 of this embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 1004, or credits are used to set the number of bets. In order to use the credit, the single BET switch 1005 or the MAX BET switch 1006 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets (for example, 3) determined according to the gaming state are set, the pay lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 46) become valid and the operation of the start switch 1007 is valid, that is, the game Is ready to start. When medals are inserted in excess of the maximum number among the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether or not the symbol combination displayed in the see-through window 1003 of each reel 1002L, 1002C, and 1002R is a specific symbol combination. In the present embodiment, these combinations are also referred to as “winning combination” or “winning combination”, and a combination of symbols constituting any combination stops on the winning line, and a winning occurs. Also called etc. For example, when the symbol combination constituting the re-gamer is derived on the winning line, a replay game in which the player can play the next game without setting the number of bets using a medal is activated. It is also said that the re-game winning (replay winning) occurs when the symbol combination constituting the re-game is derived on the winning line.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46, a winning line L1 set across the symbols arranged in the middle row of each reel 1002L, 1002C, 1002R, and the symbols arranged in the upper row of each reel 1002L, 1002C, 1002R. The winning line L2 set in the above, the winning line L3 set across the symbols arranged in the lower stage of each reel 1002L, 1002C, 1002R, the upper stage of the reel 1002L, the middle stage of the reel 1002C, the lower stage of the reel 1002R, that is, lower right. There are five types of winning lines: a winning line L4 set across the arranged symbols, a lower stage of the reel 1002L, a middle stage of the reel 1002C, an upper stage of the reel 1002R, that is, a winning line L5 set across the symbols arranged in the upward direction. It is defined as.

  When the start switch 1007 is operated while the game can be started, the reels 1002L, 1002C, and 1002R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 1002L, 1002C, and 1002R continuously change. If any one of the stop switches 1008L, 1008C, 1008R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 1002L, 1002C, 1002R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 1003.

  When all of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, if the combination of symbols that generate a small part in any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5 is not stopped, one game is ended at the time of the stop To do. On the other hand, when the combination of symbols for generating a small combination in any of the activated winning lines L1 to L5 is stopped, the number of medals determined according to the winning of the small combination is given to the player. Granting (credit addition, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), the medal is discharged from the medal payout exit 9 (see FIG. 46)), and one game is finished.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 1040, an effect control board 1090, and a power supply board 1101, and the game state is controlled by the game control board 1040, and the effect control board 1090 is provided. The effect according to the gaming state is controlled by the above, and the power supply board 1101 generates the drive power of the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1001 and supplies them to each part.

  The power board 1101 includes a hopper motor 1034b, a payout sensor 1034c, a full sensor 1035a, a stop switch 1036a, an automatic checkout switch 1036b, a setting key switch 1037, a reset / setting switch 1038, and a power switch 1039. Is connected.

  The game control board 1040 includes a single BET switch 1005, a MAXBET switch 1006, a start switch 1007, stop switches 1008L, 1008C, and 1008R, a checkout switch 1010, a reset switch 1023, a door opening detection switch 1025, The reel sensors 1033L, 1033C, and 1033R are connected, and the payout sensor 1034c, the full sensor 1035a, the stop switch 1036a, the automatic checkout switch 1036b, the setting key switch 1037, and the reset are connected via the power supply board 1101. / Setting switch 1038 is connected, and detection signals of these connected switches are input.

  The game control board 1040 includes a credit indicator 1011, a game auxiliary indicator 1012, a payout indicator 1013, 1 to 3 BETLEDs 1014 to 1016, an insertion request LED 1017, a start valid LED 1018, a waiting LED 1019, and a replaying The LED 1020, the BET switch valid LED 1021, the left, middle, and right stop valid LEDs 1022L, 1022C, 1022R, the set value display 1024, the flow path switching solenoid 1030, and the reel motors 1032L, 1032C, 1032R are connected. In addition, a hopper motor 1034b is connected via a power supply board 1101, and these electric components are driven based on the control of the main control unit 1041 mounted on the game control board 1040.

  A main control unit 1041 that controls the game is mounted on the game control board 1040. The main control unit 1041 includes a microcomputer that includes a main CPU 1041a, a ROM 1041b, a RAM 1041c, and an I / O port 1041d.

  The game control board 1040 includes a random number circuit 1042 that generates random numbers within a predetermined range (0 to 65535 in the present embodiment), a pulse oscillator 1043 that supplies a clock signal having a constant frequency to the random number circuit 1042, and a game control board 1040. A switch detection circuit 1044 that detects detection signals input from switches connected directly or via the power supply board 1101, a motor drive circuit 1045 that controls the drive of the reel motors 1032L, 1032C, and 1032R, and a flow path switching solenoid A solenoid drive circuit 1046 that controls the drive of 1030, an LED drive circuit 1047 that controls the drive of various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 1040, and a power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1001 are monitored and Voltage drop to indicate when a drop is detected Power interruption detection circuit 1048 for outputting a signal to the main control unit 1041, a reset circuit 1049 for supplying a reset signal to the main CPU 1041a when the power is turned on or when an initialization command is not input from the main CPU 1041a, various other devices, Circuit is mounted.

  The main CPU 1041a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, executes a program stored in the ROM 1041b, performs a process related to the progress of the game, and plays a game control board 1040. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the is directly or indirectly controlled. The ROM 1041b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the main CPU 1041a and various tables. The RAM 1041c is used as a work area when the main CPU 1041a executes a program. The I / O port 1041d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 1041.

  The main CPU 1041a transmits various commands to the effect control board 1090 via the I / O port 1041d. Here, from the game control board 1040 to the effect control board 1090, for example, by using a unidirectional circuit such as a diode or a transistor, only in one direction (direction from the game control board 1040 to the effect control board 1090). The signal is configured not to pass. Therefore, the command transmitted from the game control board 1040 to the effect control board 1090 is transmitted in only one direction, and the command is not transmitted from the effect control board 1090 to the game control board 1040.

  An effect switch 1056, a store side setting switch 1060, and a player side setting switch 1070 are connected to the effect control board 1090, and detection signals from these switches are input.

  On the effect control board 1090, a liquid crystal display 1051 (see FIG. 47) disposed on the front door 1001b of the slot machine 1001, an effect LED 1052, speakers 1053 and 1054, a reel LED 1055, movable means 1901 to 1903, and light emission notification means. Production devices such as 1951 to 1953 are connected, and these production devices are driven based on the control by the sub-control unit 1091 mounted on the production control board 190.

  For example, when the channel of the store side setting switch 1060 is switched to “0”, the sub-control unit 1091 outputs the sound at the minimum volume in accordance with the first volume level of “0”. In addition to controlling 1054, the liquid crystal display 1051, the effect effect LED 1052, and the like are controlled so as to output light with the minimum light amount in accordance with the first light amount step of “0”.

The effect control board 1090 includes a sub-control unit 1091 that controls the effect, a display control circuit 1092 that controls the display of the liquid crystal display 1051 connected to the effect control board 1090, and drive control of the effect LED 1052 and the reel LED 1055. LED drive circuit 1093 for performing the sound output, sound output circuit 1094 for controlling sound output from the speakers 1053 and 1054, and a reset signal to the sub CPU 1091a when the power is turned on or when the initialization command from the sub CPU 1091a is not input for a certain period of time When the reset circuit 1095, the switch circuit 1096 for detecting a detection signal input from the effect switch 1056 connected to the effect control board 1090, and the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1001 are monitored and a voltage drop is detected To indicate that A power interruption detection circuit 1098 for outputting a lowering signal to the sub CPU 1091a, a movable means driving circuit 1099 for controlling the driving of the movable means 1901 to 1903 connected to the effect control board 1090, and other circuits are mounted. The sub CPU 1091 a receives various commands transmitted from the game control board 1040, performs various controls for performing effects, and directly or indirectly controls each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 1090. To do.
In this embodiment, the effect control board 1090 including the display control circuit 1092 and the liquid crystal display 1051 are electrically connected by serial signal lines (serial signal lines similar to the signal line groups 128 and 129a to 129d in the first embodiment). Is connected to. In the present embodiment, the effect control board 1090 including the movable means driving circuit 1099 and the liquid crystal display 1051 are electrically connected by a serial signal line.

  The sub control unit 1091 is constituted by a microcomputer including a sub CPU 1091a, a ROM 1091b, a RAM 1091c, and an I / O port 1091d. The sub CPU 1091a receives the command transmitted from the game control board 1040, performs various controls for performing an effect, and directly or indirectly controls each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 1090. .

  Similar to the main control unit 1041, the sub control unit 1091 has an interrupt function, generates an interrupt when receiving a command from the main control unit 1041, and acquires a command transmitted from the main control unit 1041. The command reception interrupt process stored in the buffer is executed. The sub-control unit 1091 executes a timer interrupt process (sub) by generating an interrupt every time the number of input system clocks reaches a certain number, that is, every certain interval.

  Unlike the main control unit 1041, the sub control unit 1091 interrupts the process even if the timer interrupt process (sub) is being executed when an interrupt is generated based on the reception of the command. The reception interrupt process is executed, and the command reception interrupt process is executed with the highest priority even if interrupts that trigger the timer interrupt process (sub) occur simultaneously.

[Settings]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in internal lottery, navigation stock lottery, or the like. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate and the payout rate being lower as the value is decreased in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases stepwise. The set values may be set in three stages such as 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, H (High), and in seven stages 1 to 7, and need not be limited to six stages.

  In this embodiment, regardless of which set value is set, the winning probability of the internal lottery performed by the main control unit 1041 is common, and the navigation stock lottery performed by the sub-control unit 1091 according to the set value, The medal payout rate is changed by using different winning probabilities as winning probabilities for the extra lottery, but at least one or both of the winning probabilities of the lottery performed by the main control unit 1041 and the winning probabilities of the lottery performed by the sub-control unit 1091 It is only necessary that the medal payout rate is changed by changing the winning probability according to the set value.

  In order to change the set value, first, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1001 after the setting key switch 1037 is turned on with the front door 1001b opened. When the setting key switch 1037 is turned on and the power supply is turned on, the setting value read from a RAM (not shown) of the main control unit 1041 is displayed as a display value on the setting value display 1024 and set by operating the reset / setting switch 1038. Shifts to a setting change state (setting change mode) in which a value can be changed. When the reset / setting switch 1038 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the setting value display 1024 is updated by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the setting value is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 1007 is operated, the display value is determined as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 1037 is turned off, the determined display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM, and the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed. The setting value may not be changed unless the front door 1001b is opened, thereby preventing unauthorized setting changes when the front door 1001b is not opened. In other words, the opening condition of the front door 1001b, the operation of turning on the setting key switch 1037, and the operation of the power switch 1039 may be set as the setting change state start conditions. In this case, the set value change state may be maintained regardless of opening / closing of the front door 1001b until the setting key switch 1037 is turned off. That is, even when the opening of the front door 1001b is set as the start condition of the setting change state, the opening / closing of the front door 1001b may not be set as the end condition of the setting change state.

  Further, in order to confirm the set value, it is only necessary to open the front door 1001b and set the setting key switch 1037 to the ON state after the game is finished, in a state where the bet number is not set. When the setting key switch 1037 is turned on in such a situation, the setting value read out from the RAM is displayed on the setting value display 1024, so that the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode). Transition. In the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be progressed, and when the setting key switch 1037 is turned off, the setting confirmation state is ended and the state in which the game can proceed is restored. Similarly to the set value change state, the set value confirmation state prevents unauthorized setting confirmation when the front door 1001b is not opened by preventing the set value from being changed unless the front door 1001b is opened. May be. In other words, the setting confirmation state start condition may be the opening of the front door 1001b and the operation of turning on the setting key switch 1037. Even when the opening of the front door 1001b is set as the start condition for the set value confirmation state, the opening and closing of the front door 1001b may not be set as the end condition for the set value confirmation state.

[Operation check of movable means]
Next, the operation confirmation of the movable means 1901 to 1903 will be described. FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the movable means 1901 to 1903. The movable means 1901 to 1903 are members that are movable during production or the like. The movable means 1901 moves between the initial position 1911 and the movable position 1921. The initial position 1911 is a position that does not overlap the display area of the liquid crystal display 1051. The movable position 1921 is a position overlapping the display area of the liquid crystal display 1051. The movable means 1902 moves between the initial position 1912 and the movable position 1922. The initial position 1912 is a position that does not overlap the display area of the liquid crystal display 1051. The movable position 1922 is a position overlapping the display area of the liquid crystal display 1051. The movable means 1903 moves between the initial position 1913 and the movable position 1923. The initial position 1913 and the movable position 1923 are positions that do not overlap with the display area of the liquid crystal display 1051.

  In the present embodiment, the sub control unit 1091 operates as a confirmation operation control unit, and confirms the operation of the movable units 1901 to 1903 under a predetermined condition. Note that the predetermined condition is when, for example, when the slot machine 1001 is turned on or when an operation error of the movable unit 1901 to 1903 is detected, the operation or initial position of the movable unit 1901 to 1903 is to be confirmed. is there.

  Specifically, the sub-control unit 1091 moves the movable means 1901 to 1903 to the movable positions 1921 to 1923 (FIGS. 50A to 50C). In the illustrated example, the movable means 1901 to 1903 exist at the initial positions 1911 to 1913 before the operation check (FIG. 50A), but before the operation check, the movable means 1901 to 1903 become the initial positions 1911 to 1911. Even if it does not exist in 1913, the movable means 1901 to 1903 are moved to the movable positions 1921 to 1923 (FIG. 50C). Thereafter, the sub-control unit 1091 moves the movable means 1901 to 1903 from the movable positions 1921 to 1923 to the initial positions 1911 to 1913 (FIGS. 50C to 50E).

  By confirming the operation of the movable means 1901 to 1903 in this way, the movable means 1901 to 1903 can be moved to the initial positions 1911 to 1913 after the operation confirmation. Further, for example, by detecting the operation of the movable means 1901 to 1903 in the operation confirmation with, for example, a sensor (not shown), it can be confirmed whether or not the movable means 1901 to 1903 operate normally.

In the operation confirmation of the movable means 1901 to 1903, the movable means 1901 to 1903 actually move, and therefore it takes time to complete the operation confirmation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 1090 is initially set in parallel with the operation confirmation of the movable units 1901 to 1903. The initial setting of the effect control board 1090 is a process for making settings necessary for the effect control board 1090 to operate. For example, the sub control unit 1091 operates as an initial setting unit, and the sub CPU 1091a performs initial setting of the effect control board 1090 by reading and executing a program stored in the ROM 1091b. By performing the initial setting of the effect control board 1090, each process by the effect control board 1090 can be executed. For example, displaying an effect image or the like on the liquid crystal display 1051, outputting a sound from the speakers 1053, 1054, receiving an operation of the player side setting switch 1070, and performing a process based on the received operation. Can do.
In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the sub-control unit 1091 sends a display-on command to the liquid crystal display 1051 by serial communication with a specific clock frequency when the power is turned on or when demo switching is started. After transmitting the display-on command, the serial communication clock frequency is lowered to a non-transmission frequency lower than a specific frequency.

  In the example shown in FIG. 50, while the movable means 1901 to 1903 move from the initial positions 1911 to 1913 to the movable positions 1921 to 1923 (FIGS. 50A to 50B), the initial stage of the effect control board 1090 is displayed. Settings are being made. Further, by completing the initial setting of the effect control board 1090, for example, an effect image can be displayed on the liquid crystal display 1051 (FIGS. 50C to 50E).

  As described above, even when the movable means 1901 to 1903 are moving during the confirmation operation execution period, after the initial setting period setting of the effect control board 1090 is completed, the player side setting switch 1070 is accepted and accepted. The sub-control unit 1091 can perform processing based on the operation performed. However, it is troublesome if processing associated with the operation of the player side setting switch 1070 is performed while the movable means 1901 to 1903 are operating during the confirmation operation execution period. Therefore, in this embodiment, during the confirmation operation execution period, the operation of the player side setting switch 1070 is not accepted, and the troublesomeness of the confirmation operation execution period is reduced. In the present embodiment, the player side setting switch 1070 can be turned on and off. Therefore, in the confirmation operation execution period, the player-side setting switch 1070 is turned off so that the player-side setting switch 1070 is not easily operated by the player, thereby reducing the troublesomeness of the confirmation operation execution period.

  FIG. 51 shows a period during which the movable units 1901 to 1903 are checked after the slot machine 1 is turned on, a period during which the player side setting switch 1070 is not allowed to accept input, and a period during which the player side setting switch 1070 is turned off. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a period during which input acceptance of the player side setting switch 1070 is permitted and a period during which the player side setting switch 1070 is lit.

  In the example shown in the drawing, the confirmation operation execution period of the movable units 1901 to 1903 is from the power-on of the slot machine 1001 to the time t1. In addition, the period during which input acceptance of the player side setting switch 1070 is prohibited and the period during which the player side setting switch 1070 is turned off are from the time when the slot machine 1001 is turned on until time t2. In addition, a period during which input acceptance of the player side setting switch 1070 is permitted and a period during which the player side setting switch 1070 is lit are periods after time t2.

  As shown in the drawing, the period from the slot machine 1001 power-on to the time t2 is longer than the period from the slot machine 1001 power-on to the time t1. In this way, by controlling the period during which the input acceptance of the player side setting switch 1070 is prohibited and the period during which the player side setting switch 1070 is permitted, the operation of the player side setting switch 1070 is not accepted during the confirmation operation execution period. Can do. As a result, processing associated with the operation of the player side setting switch 1070 is not performed during the confirmation operation execution period, and annoyance during the confirmation operation execution period can be reduced. Further, by controlling the period during which the player side setting switch 1070 is turned off and the period during which the player side setting switch 1070 is lit, it is possible to make it difficult for the player side setting switch 1070 to be operated during the confirmation operation execution period. Thereby, it becomes difficult to perform the process accompanying the operation of the player-side setting switch 1070 in the confirmation operation execution period, and the troublesomeness in the confirmation operation execution period can be reduced.

  The relationship between the time t1 and the time t2 is any relationship if the period from the slot machine 1001 power-on to the time t2 is longer than the period from the slot machine 1001 power-on to the time t1. It may be. In other words, any period may be used as long as the input acceptance of the player side setting switch 1070 is prohibited until the confirmation operation execution period of the movable units 1901 to 1903 ends. Further, it may be a period in which the player side setting switch 1070 is extinguished until the confirmation operation execution period of the movable units 1901 to 1903 ends.

  FIG. 52 shows the confirmation operation execution period of the movable units 1901 to 1903 when, for example, the operation of the movable units 1901 to 1903 is defective and the confirmation operation execution period of the movable units 1901 to 1903 is longer than normal. A period during which input acceptance of the player side setting switch 1070 is prohibited and a period during which the player side setting switch 1070 is turned off, a period during which input acceptance by the player side setting switch 1070 is permitted, and a period during which the player side setting switch 1070 is lit. FIG.

  The confirmation operation execution period of the movable units 1901 to 1903 at the normal time is from the time when the slot machine 1001 is turned on until the time t1. However, in the illustrated example, the confirmation operation execution period of the movable units 1901 to 1903 is longer than normal, and is from the time when the slot machine 1001 is turned on until the time t3.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 1901 to 1903 becomes longer, the period during which the input acceptance of the player side setting switch 1070 is prohibited is longer than the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 1901 to 1903. Also make it longer. In the example shown in the drawing, the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 1901 to 1903 is from the time when the slot machine 1001 is turned on until time t3, and the period during which the player side setting switch 1070 is prohibited from accepting input is the slot machine 1001. It is from time after turning on the power to time t4. The period during which the player side setting switch 1070 is allowed to accept input is a period after time t4.

  As a result, even when the confirmation operation execution period of the movable units 1901 to 1903 is longer than normal, processing associated with the operation of the player side setting switch 1070 is not performed during the confirmation operation execution period. Therefore, it is possible to reduce troublesomeness in the confirmation operation execution period.

  In this embodiment, when the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 1901 to 1903 becomes longer, the period during which the player side setting switch 1070 is turned off is longer than the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 1901 to 1903. . In the example shown, the confirmation operation execution period of the movable units 1901 to 1903 is from the time when the slot machine 1001 is turned on until time t3, and the period during which the player side setting switch 1070 is turned off is after the slot machine 1001 is turned on. To time t4. The period during which the player setting switch 1070 is lit is a period after time t4.

  Thereby, even when the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 1901 to 1903 becomes longer than normal, it is possible to make it difficult for the player side setting switch 1070 to be operated during the confirmation operation execution period. Therefore, it becomes difficult to perform processing associated with the operation of the player side setting switch 1070 during the confirmation operation execution period, and the troublesomeness during the confirmation operation execution period can be reduced.

  As shown in the drawing, the period from the slot machine 1001 power-on to the time t4 is longer than the period from the slot machine 1001 power-on to the time t3. Thus, according to the length of the confirmation operation execution period of the movable units 10901 to 10903, the period during which the input acceptance of the player side setting switch 1070 is prohibited and the period during which the input is permitted are controlled. Can be configured not to accept the operation of the player side setting switch 1070. As a result, processing associated with the operation of the player side setting switch 1070 is not performed during the confirmation operation execution period, and annoyance during the confirmation operation execution period can be reduced. Further, by controlling the period during which the player side setting switch 1070 is turned off and the period during which the player side setting switch 1070 is turned on according to the length of the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 1901 to 1903, The setting switch 1070 can be made difficult to operate. Thereby, it becomes difficult to perform the process accompanying the operation of the player-side setting switch 1070 in the confirmation operation execution period, and the troublesomeness in the confirmation operation execution period can be reduced.

  The relationship between the time t3 and the time t4 is any relationship if the period from the slot machine 1001 power-on to the time t4 is longer than the period from the slot machine 1001 power-on to the time t2. It may be. In other words, any period may be used as long as the input acceptance of the player side setting switch 1070 is prohibited until the confirmation operation execution period of the movable units 1901 to 1903 ends. Further, it may be a period in which the player side setting switch 70 is extinguished until the confirmation operation execution period of the movable units 1901 to 1903 ends.

  In the above-described example, the movable units 1901 to 1903 are simultaneously operated during the confirmation operation execution period of the movable units 1901 to 1903. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the movable means 1901 to 1903 may be moved individually during the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 1901 to 1903. As a specific example, first, the movable means 1901 is operated from the movable position 1921 to the movable position 1921, and then the movable means 1901 is operated from the movable position 1921 to the initial position 1911. Subsequently, the movable unit 1902 is operated to the movable position 1922, and then the movable unit 1902 is operated from the movable position 1922 to the initial position 1912. Subsequently, the movable unit 1903 is operated to the movable position 1923, and then the movable unit 1903 is operated from the movable position 1923 to the initial position 1913. The order of confirming the operation of the movable units 1901 to 1903 may be any order. Moreover, the timing of the operation confirmation of the plurality of movable units 1901 to 1903 may overlap. For example, confirmation of the operation of the movable unit 1902 or the movable unit 1903 may be started while the operation of the movable unit 1901 is being confirmed.

  When the operation confirmation of the movable means 1901 to 1903 is performed individually, after completion of the operation confirmation of the predetermined movable means 1901 to 1903, the period during which the player side setting switch 1070 is allowed to accept input and the player side setting A period for lighting the switch 1070 may be used. For example, in the case where only the movable unit 1901 is troublesome to operate simultaneously with the processing associated with the operation of the player side setting switch 1070 among the movable units 1901 to 1903, after the operation confirmation of the movable unit 1901 is completed, the player It is good also as a period which permits the input reception of the side setting switch 1070, and the period which makes the player side setting switch 1070 light.

  FIG. 53 shows the confirmation of the movable means 1901 to 1903 in the period when the input acceptance of the player side setting switch 1070 is permitted and the period when the player side setting switch 1070 is turned on after the operation confirmation of the movable means 1901 is completed. An operation execution period, a period during which input acceptance of the player side setting switch 1070 is prohibited, a period during which the player side setting switch 1070 is turned off, a period during which input acceptance by the player side setting switch 1070 is permitted, and a player side setting switch It is the figure which showed the period which makes 1070 light.

  In the example shown in the drawing, the confirmation operation execution period of the movable unit 1901 is a period from when the slot machine 1001 is powered on to time t1. In addition, the confirmation operation execution period of the movable unit 1902 is a period from time t1 to time t5. Further, the confirmation operation execution period of the movable unit 1903 is a period from time t5 to time t6.

  In addition, the period during which input acceptance of the player side setting switch 1070 is prohibited and the period during which the player side setting switch 1070 is turned off are from the time when the slot machine 1001 is turned on until time t2. In addition, a period during which input acceptance of the player side setting switch 1070 is permitted and a period during which the player side setting switch 1070 is lit are periods after time t2.

  As shown in the drawing, the period from the slot machine 1001 power-on to the time t2 is longer than the period from the slot machine 1001 power-on to the time t1. In this way, by controlling the period during which the input acceptance of the player side setting switch 1070 is prohibited and the period during which the player side setting switch 1070 is permitted, the operation of the player side setting switch 1070 is not accepted during the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 1901. Can be. As a result, processing associated with the operation of the player side setting switch 1070 is not performed during the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 1901, and troublesomeness during the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 1901 can be reduced. Further, by controlling the period during which the player side setting switch 1070 is extinguished and the period during which the player side setting switch 1070 is lit, it is possible to make it difficult for the player side setting switch 1070 to be operated during the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 1901. it can. Thereby, it becomes difficult to perform processing associated with the operation of the player side setting switch 1070 during the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 1901, and the troublesomeness during the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 1901 can be reduced.

  The relationship between the time t1 and the time t2 is any relationship as long as the period from the slot machine 1 power-on to the time t2 is longer than the period from the slot machine 1001 power-on to the time t1. It may be. In other words, any period may be used that prohibits input acceptance of the player side setting switch 1070 until the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 1901 ends. Further, it may be a period during which the player side setting switch 1070 is extinguished until the confirmation operation execution period of the movable unit 1901 ends.

[Volume and light intensity setting screen]
The volume and light quantity setting screen will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 54, in the present embodiment, when the player operates the player side setting switch 1070, a setting screen for adjusting the volume and the amount of light is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 1051. .

  In the setting screen, the numbers “2” to “14” corresponding to the volume level (second volume level) that can be set by the player (the higher the number, the higher the volume) are displayed in the volume setting area 1052a. The This is also called volume display. Furthermore, among the numbers “2” to “14”, the number corresponding to the currently set volume is highlighted (flashing display, display for changing the color of the selected item, etc.). The player can change the second volume level by moving the highlight by performing a predetermined change operation. For example, the player can move the highlight to the right by operating the stop switch 1008R to increase the second volume level, while moving the highlight to the left by operating the stop switch 1008L. The second volume level can be lowered.

  In the setting screen, in the light amount setting area 1052b, the numbers “50%”, “75%”, and “100%” corresponding to the light amount level (second light amount step) that can be set by the player (the one with the larger number) Is displayed). This is also called light quantity display. Further, among the numbers “50%”, “75%”, and “100%”, the number corresponding to the currently set light amount is highlighted (flashing display, display for changing the color of the selected item, etc.). The The player can change the second light quantity step by moving the highlight by performing a predetermined change operation. For example, the player can move the highlighting to the right by operating the stop switch 1008R to increase the second light quantity step, while moving the highlighting to the left by operating the stop switch 1008L. The second light intensity step can be lowered. Note that switching between the second volume level and the second volume level can be performed by operating the stop switch 1008C.

Furthermore, on the setting screen, in the character effect area 1052c, a battle effect screen of the teammate character and the enemy character, which is a part of the effect screen actually used during the game, is displayed. In the present embodiment, the player can set the volume and the amount of light using this battle effect as a sample. Specifically, if the player increases the second volume level, the volume of the ally character's voice (in the example of FIG. 54, the voice of “Did you come!”) Increases, and the player can decrease the second volume level. As a result, the sound volume of the ally character is reduced. Also, if the player increases the second light intensity step, the light amount on the battle effect screen increases and becomes brighter, and if the player decreases the second light amount step, the light amount on the battle effect screen decreases and darkens.
In this way, since the actual volume during play and the amount of light can be set by taking the actual play during the game as an example, the player can easily make the settings.

[Turn on / off the player setting switch]
With reference to FIG. 55, a player side setting switch lighting process for controlling lighting and extinguishing of the player side setting switch 1070 executed by the sub-control unit 1091 will be described. As described above, it is troublesome if the process associated with the operation of the player side setting switch 1070 is performed while the movable units 1901 to 1903 are operating during the confirmation operation execution period. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the confirmation operation execution period, the player side setting switch 1070 is turned off so that the player side setting switch 1070 is not easily operated by the player. Thereby, it becomes difficult to perform the process accompanying the operation of the player-side setting switch 1070 in the confirmation operation execution period, and the troublesomeness in the confirmation operation execution period can be reduced.

  Further, during the game, the setting screen is not displayed, and the volume and light quantity are not set. That is, during the game, input acceptance of the player side setting switch 1070 is prohibited. Therefore, in order to notify that the operation of the player side setting switch 1070 is invalid, the sub-control unit 1091 turns off the player side setting switch 1070 during the game.

  Note that the sub-control unit 1091 determines whether or not the game is in progress based on a command transmitted from the main control unit 1041. For example, in this embodiment, when the start switch 1007 is operated and the game starts, an “internal winning command” is transmitted from the main control unit 1041 to the sub control unit 1091. Also, a “gaming state command” is transmitted from the main control unit 1041 to the sub-control unit 1091 at the end of the game. Therefore, the sub-control unit 1091 can determine that the period from the reception of the “internal winning command” to the reception of the “gaming state command” is being played. Further, the sub-control unit 1091 can determine that the period from the reception of the “gaming state command” to the reception of the “internal winning command” is not in the game.

  The sub-control unit 1091 determines whether or not a game is in progress (step S1201). When it is determined that the game is not in progress (step S1201; N), the sub-control unit 1091 determines whether or not it is during the movable unit confirmation operation execution period (step S1202). When it is determined that the movable means confirmation operation is not being performed (step S1202; N), the sub-control unit 1091 determines whether or not the player side setting switch 1070 is turned off (step S1203). When it is determined that the player side setting switch 1070 is turned off (step S1203; Y), the sub-control unit 1091 turns on the player side setting switch 1070 (step S1204) and ends the process. If it is determined that the player side setting switch 1070 is not turned off (step S1203; N), the sub-control unit 1091 ends the process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is in progress (step S1201; Y), or when it is determined that the movable means confirmation operation is being performed (step S1202; Y), the sub-control unit 1091 is a player-side setting switch. It is determined whether 1070 is lit (step S1205). If it is determined that the player side setting switch 1070 is lit (step S1205; Y), the sub-control unit 1091 turns off the player side setting switch 1070 (step S1206) and ends the process. When it is determined that the player side setting switch 1070 is not lit (step S1205; N), the sub-control unit 1091 ends the process.

  By the player side setting switch lighting process described above, the sub-control unit 1091 can turn off the player side setting switch 1070 during the confirmation operation execution period. This makes it difficult for the player to operate the player side setting switch 1070 during the confirmation operation execution period. Therefore, it becomes difficult to perform processing associated with the operation of the player side setting switch 1070 during the confirmation operation execution period, and the troublesomeness during the confirmation operation execution period can be reduced.

  Further, by the player side setting switch lighting process described above, the sub-control unit 1091 can turn off the player side setting switch 1070 during the game. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the operation of the player side setting switch 1070 is invalid during the game. Therefore, invalid operations by the player during the game can be prevented.

  In the player side effect setting process described above, the sub-control unit 1091 turns off the player side setting switch 1070 during the confirmation operation execution period, but the player side until the initial setting of the effect control board 1090 is completed. The setting switch 1070 may be turned off. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 50, the initial setting of the effect control board 1090 is completed within the confirmation operation execution period, but there is an example where the initial setting of the effect control board 1090 is not completed within the confirmation operation execution period. If the player-side setting switch 1070 is turned on when the initial setting of the effect control board 1090 is not completed, the player-side setting switch 1070 is turned on by the player even though the initial setting of the effect control board 1090 is not completed. It becomes easy to be operated. For example, when the player side setting switch 1070 is operated when the initial setting of the effect control board 1090 is not completed, the setting screen is displayed in a state where the effect display displayed on the liquid crystal display 1051 is not normally performed. Sometimes done. Accordingly, the sub-control unit 1091 can make it difficult for the player to operate by turning off the player side setting switch 1070 until the initial setting of the effect control board 1090 is completed. It is possible to reduce the display of the setting screen in a state where the effect display to be displayed is not normally performed.

  Further, the sub-control unit 1091 may turn off the player side setting switch 1070 until both the confirmation operation execution period and the initial setting of the effect control board 1090 are completed. For example, depending on the operation status of the movable units 1901 to 1903, when the initial setting of the effect control board 1090 is completed earlier than the confirmation operation execution period, or when the confirmation operation execution period is earlier than the initial setting of the effect control board 1090 There are both cases where it completes first. As a specific example, when the movable means 1901 to 1903 operate smoothly, the confirmation operation execution period is completed earlier than the initial setting of the effect control board 1090, but it is caught during the operation of the movable means 1901 to 1903. If there is, the confirmation operation execution period becomes longer, and the initial setting of the effect control board 1090 may be completed earlier than the confirmation operation execution period.

  Therefore, the sub-control unit 1091 turns off the player-side setting switch 1070 until both the confirmation operation execution period and the initial setting of the effect control board 1090 are completed, thereby confirming the confirmation operation execution period and the initial stage of the effect control board 1090. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to operate the player side setting switch 1070 when the setting is performed. Thereby, for example, the process associated with the operation of the player side setting switch 1070 is difficult to be performed in the confirmation operation execution period, and the troublesomeness in the confirmation operation execution period can be reduced. In addition, for example, it is possible to reduce the display of the setting screen in a state where the effect display displayed on the liquid crystal display 1051 is not normally performed.

[Player side production setting process]
The player side effect setting process executed by the sub control unit 1091 will be described with reference to FIG. The player side effect setting process is a process executed when the player changes the setting of the effect mode during the game. By executing the player side effect setting process, the player can set the volume level in the effect (second volume level) and the light level in the effect (second light level level). .

As described above, it is troublesome if the process associated with the operation of the player side setting switch 1070 is performed while the movable units 1901 to 1903 are operating during the confirmation operation execution period. Therefore, in this embodiment, during the confirmation operation execution period, input acceptance of the player side setting switch 1070 is prohibited and the operation is invalidated. Thereby, the process accompanying the operation of the player side setting switch 1070 is not performed in the confirmation operation execution period, and the troublesomeness in the confirmation operation execution period can be reduced.
Further, during the game, the setting screen is not displayed, and the volume and light quantity are not set. That is, during the game, input acceptance of the player side setting switch 1070 is prohibited and the operation is invalidated.

  The sub-control unit 1091 determines whether or not the player side setting switch 1070 has been operated (step S1151). When the sub-control unit 1091 determines that the player side setting switch 1070 has not been operated (step S1151; N), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the player setting switch 1070 has been operated (step S1151; Y), the sub-control unit 1091 determines whether or not a game is in progress (step S1152). If it is determined that the game is in progress (step S1152; Y), the sub-control unit 1091 ends the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is not in progress (step S1152; N), the sub-control unit 1091 determines whether or not the movable means confirmation operation is being performed (step S1153). If it is determined that the movable unit confirmation operation is being performed (step S1153; Y), the sub-control unit 1091 ends the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not during the movable unit confirmation operation execution period (step S1153; N), the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the door opening detection switch 1025 is in the ON state (step S1154). When the sub control unit 1091 determines that the door open detection switch 1025 is in the OFF state, that is, the front door 1001b is open (step S1154; N), the sub control unit 1091 ends the process.

  On the other hand, when the sub-control unit 1091 determines that the door opening detection switch 1025 is ON, that is, the front door 1001b is closed (step S1154; Y), the channel setting of the store setting switch 1060 is “A”. ”To“ F ”is determined (step S1155). When the sub control unit 1091 determines that the channel setting of the store side setting switch 1060 is within the range of “A” to “F” (step S1155; Y), the second volume level and the second light quantity level by the player. The process ends to limit (prohibit) the setting of. In this case, the sound volume and the light amount are set based on the channel setting of the player setting switch 1070 (that is, the first sound volume step and the first light amount step).

  On the other hand, when the sub-control unit 1091 determines that the channel setting of the store side setting switch 1060 is not within the range of “A” to “F” (step S1155; N), the setting screen shown in FIG. In addition to the display on the device 1051, initial display is performed according to the channel setting of the store side setting switch 1060 (step S1156).

  For example, FIG. 54 shows an example of a setting screen when the channel setting of the store side setting switch 1060 is within the range of “4” to “9”. In this case, “2” to “14” are displayed in the volume setting area 1052a, and “50%”, “75%”, and “100%” are displayed in the light quantity setting area 1052b. Is done. Further, in the volume setting area 1052a, initial display with “10” highlighted is performed, and in the light amount setting area 1052b, initial display with “75%” highlighted is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the setting screen is displayed by operating the player side setting switch 1070 when the front door 1001b is closed, but it continues after the front door 1001b is opened. The setting screen is displayed. For this reason, after the front door 1001b is closed again, the setting screen before opening is continuously displayed. That is, once the setting screen is displayed, the setting screen continues to be displayed even when the front door 1001b is opened.

  After displaying the setting screen, the sub-control unit 1091 determines whether the volume or the amount of light has been changed based on the changing operation using the player's stop switch (step S1157). When the sub-control unit 1091 determines that the volume or the amount of light has not been changed within the predetermined period (step S1157; N), the sub-control unit 1091 proceeds to step S1162. On the other hand, when the sub-control unit 1091 determines that the volume or the amount of light has been changed (step S1157; Y), it is determined whether or not the channel setting of the store-side setting switch 1060 is within the range of “A” to “F”. Determination is made (step S1158). When the sub control unit 1091 determines that the channel setting of the store side setting switch 1060 is within the range of “A” to “F” (step S1158; Y), the second volume level and the second light quantity level by the player. In step S1162, the process proceeds to step S1162.

  On the other hand, when the sub-control unit 1091 determines that the channel setting of the store-side setting switch 1060 is not within the range of “A” to “F” (step S1158; N), whether or not the changed target is the volume. Is determined (step S1159). When the sub-control unit 1091 determines that the changed target is not the volume but the light amount (step S1159; N), the sub-control unit 1091 determines the light amount in the effect based on the channel setting of the store-side setting switch 1060 and the game. The light quantity is set according to the light quantity setting selected by the person (step S1161). In the light quantity setting area 1052b in FIG. 54, the highlighting moves based on the selected light quantity, and in the character effect area 1052c, the light quantity of the battle effect screen changes based on the selected light quantity. Thereafter, the sub-control unit 1091 proceeds to step S1162. On the other hand, if the sub-control unit 1091 determines that the changed target is the volume (step S1159; Y), the sub-control unit 1091 executes a predetermined volume change operation process (step S1160), and proceeds to step S1162.

  Thereafter, the sub-control unit 1091 determines whether or not an end operation has been performed (step S1162). In the present embodiment, the ending operation is performed by long pressing the player side setting switch 1070. If the sub-control unit 1091 determines that the end operation has not been performed within the predetermined period (step S1162; N), the process returns to step S1157. On the other hand, if the sub-control unit 1091 determines that the end operation has been performed (step S1162; Y), the display of the setting screen is ended (step S1163), and the process ends. When the player-side effect setting process ends, the sound volume set based on the first sound volume stage and the second sound volume stage and the light intensity set based on the first light intensity stage and the second light intensity stage are reflected in the effect. The

  By the player side effect setting process described above, the sub-control unit 1091 can prohibit input acceptance of the player side setting switch 1070 during the confirmation operation execution period. Thereby, in the confirmation operation execution period, the process accompanying the operation of the player side setting switch 1070 is not performed, and the troublesomeness in the confirmation operation execution period can be reduced.

  Further, the player-side effect setting process described above allows the sub-control unit 1091 to prohibit input acceptance of the player-side setting switch 1070 during the game. Thereby, during a game, the process accompanying operation of the player side setting switch 1070 is not performed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In the player side effect setting process described above, the sub-control unit 1091 prohibits input acceptance of the player side setting switch 1070 during the confirmation operation execution period, but until the initial setting of the effect control board 1090 is completed. You may make it prohibit the input reception of the player side setting switch 1070. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 50, the initial setting of the effect control board 1090 is completed within the confirmation operation execution period, but there is an example where the initial setting of the effect control board 1090 is not completed within the confirmation operation execution period. If the player side setting switch 1070 is allowed to accept input when the initial setting of the effect control board 1090 is not completed, for example, the setting screen is displayed in a state where the effect display displayed on the liquid crystal display 1051 is not normally performed. May be performed. Accordingly, the sub-control unit 1091 prohibits the player side setting switch 1070 from accepting input until the initial setting of the effect control board 1090 is completed, and the player side setting switch 1070 is held until the initial setting of the effect control board 1090 is completed. The setting screen may not be displayed even when the player's operation is accepted. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the setting screen from being displayed in a state where the effect display displayed on the liquid crystal display 1051 is not normally performed.

  Further, the sub control unit 1091 may prohibit input acceptance of the player side setting switch 1070 until both the confirmation operation execution period and the initial setting of the effect control board 1090 are completed. For example, depending on the operation status of the movable units 1901 to 1903, when the initial setting of the effect control board 1090 is completed earlier than the confirmation operation execution period, or when the confirmation operation execution period is earlier than the initial setting of the effect control board 1090 There are both cases where it completes first. As a specific example, when the movable means 1901 to 1903 operate smoothly, the confirmation operation execution period is completed earlier than the initial setting of the effect control board 1090, but it is caught during the operation of the movable means 1901 to 1903. If there is, the confirmation operation execution period becomes longer, and the initial setting of the effect control board 1090 may be completed earlier than the confirmation operation execution period.

  Therefore, the sub-control unit 1091 prohibits input acceptance of the player side setting switch 1070 until both the confirmation operation execution period and the initial setting of the effect control board 1090 are completed, and the confirmation operation execution period and the effect control board 1090 The setting screen may not be displayed even if the player side setting switch 1070 accepts the player's operation until both the initial setting and the initial setting are completed. Thereby, for example, in the confirmation operation execution period, the process associated with the operation of the player side setting switch 1070 is not performed, and the troublesomeness in the confirmation operation execution period can be reduced. Further, for example, it is possible to prevent the setting screen from being displayed in a state where the effect display displayed on the liquid crystal display 1051 is not normally performed.

[About player settings]
In the present embodiment, the player can set the production volume and the production light amount as settings relating to the game. However, the player sets the main side (the configuration included in the game control board 1040 such as the main control unit 1041 and the configuration connected to the game control board 1040) and the sub side (the effect control board such as the sub control unit 1091). The configuration included in 1090, the configuration connected to the presentation control board 1090, and the like) may be other settings.

  For example, the player may be able to set the pressure (pressure) and hardness when operating various operating means such as the start switch 7 and the stop switches 1008L, 1008C, 1008R as the main setting. Further, the lighting and extinguishing control of various lighting means such as the input request LED 1017 and the start valid LED and the lighting condition thereof may be set.

  For example, the player may be able to set the pressure and hardness when operating various operation means such as the effect switch 1056 as the setting on the sub side. The player may be able to set the effect mode as the sub-side setting, or may be able to set characters, music, etc. appearing in the set effect mode. The player may be able to set the power saving mode as the setting on the sub side. The player may be able to set the deletion or display of the game history (for example, the number of games, the number of bonus winnings, the number of payouts, etc.) as the setting on the sub side. Even if the player can display the password for managing the game history, etc. and input the password by communicating with the external server via the Internet with a portable terminal etc. as a setting on the sub side Good.

[Settings on the player side]
In the present embodiment, in order for the player to set the volume and the amount of light, it is necessary to operate the player side setting switch 1070 provided outside the front door 1001b. However, the operation means that can be operated by the player at the time of setting is not limited to the outside of the front door 1001b, and may be provided outside the housing 1001a that is difficult to operate, such as the side surface or the upper surface of the housing 1001a. . In this way, even when the front door 1001b is opened, there is no possibility that a player or a store clerk sitting next touches the operation means to operate.

The operation means that can be operated by the player may be provided inside the housing 1001a or inside the front door 1001b. In this case, it is only necessary that the player can be operated by exposing the operation means to the outside, such as a hole formed in the front door 1001b.
Furthermore, the operation means that can be operated by the player may be one using an operation means operated by the player during a game or the like. For example, the sound volume and the light amount may be set by operating the stop switches 1008L, 1008C, and 1008R in a special order.

  The operation means that can be operated by the player includes an operation rod that is held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation rod (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation rod). It may be a provided stick controller. The player can select an item by moving the icon displayed on the screen by defeating the operation stick, and can determine the selected item by pressing the trigger button. Also good. Alternatively, the operation means that can be operated by the player may be a jog dial or a cross key.

[Means to prohibit player settings]
In the present embodiment, even when the operating means is operated, settings relating to the game are prohibited when the front door 1001b is open. For example, even when the player side setting switch 1070 is operated, the setting of the volume and the amount of light is prohibited when the front door 1001b is opened. However, the present invention is not limited to this method, and settings relating to games may be prohibited by other methods. For example, when the front door 1001b is open, the operation unit itself may not be operated. For example, when the front door 1001b is open, even if the operation means can be operated, the input signal due to the operation may not be effectively received by the main control unit 1041 or the sub control unit 1091. For example, when the front door 1001b is open, even if an input signal based on the operation of the operating means is effectively received by the main control unit 1041 or the sub control unit 1091, processing based on the input signal is not executed. There may be. Furthermore, if the setting screen is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 1051 so that settings relating to the game can be performed, the setting screen may not be displayed when the front door 1001b is opened. Good. Or, when the front door 1001b is open, even if the setting screen is displayed, it may not be possible to make settings related to the game.

[Volume and light intensity settings]
In addition, the display which shows a 2nd volume level and a 2nd light quantity level is not restricted to the example shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 57A, the second volume level may be displayed as a bar with a number of squares corresponding to the second volume level. In this case, when an operation means such as a volume adjustment button is operated for the first time during the demonstration, a bar is first displayed as an initial display, and then the volume adjustment button (second in FIG. 57A) is displayed. The number of squares may be increased or decreased according to the operation for decreasing the volume level (decrease by 1 in FIG. 57A). Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 57B, the second volume level is displayed as a bar with the number of squares corresponding to the second volume level, and the operation means such as the volume adjustment button is operated at the beginning of the demonstration. Then, a bar in which the number of squares is increased or decreased according to the operation of the volume adjustment button (in FIG. 57B, the operation of decreasing the volume, that is, the second volume level) may be displayed first. In this case, a virtual bar before the increase / decrease may be set as the initial display. As described above, the initial display may indicate a volume level corresponding to the first volume level after the first operation and before the second operation, and is not actually displayed. It may be. Moreover, although the setting of the production | presentation aspect during a game is performed using the player side setting switch 1070, it is not restricted to this. For example, an effect mode during a game may be set using the effect switch 1056. Since the effect switch 1056 has a plurality of functions such as, for example, used for effects during a game, an explanation of the function of the effect switch 1056 may be displayed on the liquid crystal display 1051. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 57C, when the demonstration effect (normal mode) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 1051, the function of the effect switch 1056 is displayed at the lower right of the display area of the liquid crystal display 1051. You may display the description.

As described above, according to the slot machine 1001 according to the above embodiment, the sub-control unit 1091 performs serial communication with the liquid crystal display 1051 having a specific clock frequency when the power is turned on or when demo switching is started. Send display on command. Then, the sub-control unit 1091 lowers the serial communication clock frequency to a non-transmission frequency lower than the specific frequency after transmitting the display-on command.
In this way, the slot machine in which the sub control unit 1091 transmits a display-on command to the liquid crystal display 1051 by serial communication in which the clock frequency is lower than a specific frequency (for example, a frequency at the time of non-transmission). As a result, the time required to control the backlight (LED) of the liquid crystal panel to the display-on state is reduced. This also reduces the generation of high-frequency radio waves received by other devices such as wireless terminals rather than slot machines that do not lower the serial communication clock frequency below a specific frequency after sending a display-on command. However, the output of noise in other devices is reduced. As a result, the generation of radio waves received by other devices is reduced while reducing the time required for control.

Further, according to the slot machine 1001 according to the above-described embodiment, the effect control board 1090 is connected to the movable means driving circuit 1099 for driving the movable means 1901 to 1903 and the like by the serial communication line. Then, the sub-control unit 1091 transmits a drive control command to the movable means drive circuit 1099 or the like at a frequency lower than a specific frequency (frequency at the time of non-transmission) during a game different from when the power is turned on or when demo switching is started. To do.
By doing in this way, it is excessive with respect to the movable means drive circuit 1099 etc. rather than the slot machine which does not transmit a drive control command to the movable means drive circuit 1099 etc. by serial communication whose clock frequency is lower than a specific frequency. The transmission of the drive control command at a low communication speed is reduced. Further, since a drive control command is transmitted to the movable means drive circuit 1099 and the like at a time different from the time when the display on command is transmitted to the liquid crystal display 1051, a clock is supplied to the movable means drive circuit 1099 and the like. It is possible to prevent the drive control command from being transmitted by serial communication in which the frequency becomes a specific frequency. In addition, the generation of high-frequency radio waves received by other devices than the slot machine that transmits data to the movable means driving circuit 1099 and the like by serial communication with a clock frequency of a specific frequency is reduced.

Further, according to the slot machine 1001 according to the above embodiment, the sub-control unit 1091 transmits the display-on command again at the start of the next demonstration switching after transmitting the display-on command.
In this way, even if the state of the liquid crystal display 1051 changes after the display on command is transmitted, the display on command is transmitted again. Therefore, when the next demo switching starts, the liquid crystal display 1051 is displayed again. Can be in a state.

In the slot machine 1001 according to the above-described embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the sub-control unit 1091 may set the serial communication clock frequency to a specific frequency when the power is turned on as a specific condition or when demo switching is started. For example, the clock frequency of serial communication may be changed to a specific frequency after transmitting a reset signal before starting demo switching.
By doing this, the serial communication clock frequency until the start of demo switching is not set to a specific frequency when it is not necessary to set the serial communication clock frequency after the reset signal is sent before demo switching starts. Generation of high-frequency radio waves received by other devices is reduced compared to slot machines that do not set the frequency to a specific frequency.

In the slot machine 1001 according to the above-described embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the sub-control unit 1091 changes the serial communication clock frequency from the non-transmission frequency to the specific frequency after transmitting the reset signal before starting the demo switching. In this case, the transmission of the display on command may be started after one second has passed as a predetermined time after the change to the specific frequency.
By doing so, the clock signal at the time of serial communication is stabilized, so the display on command is sent more than the slot machine that does not start sending the display on command after 1 second has passed since the change to the specific frequency. The accuracy of transmission is improved.

Further, according to the slot machine 1001 according to the embodiment, the sub-control unit 1091 (confirmation operation control unit) controls the confirmation operation of the movable units 1901 to 1903. In addition, the sub-control unit 1091 (specific control execution unit) turns off the player side setting switch 1070 during the confirmation operation execution period, which is a period for controlling the confirmation operation of the movable units 1901 to 1903, and sets the player side setting switch. 1070 makes it difficult for the player to operate. .
By doing in this way, it can prevent that specific control is performed in the state which the movable member is operating.

Further, according to the slot machine 1001 according to the embodiment, the sub-control unit 1091 (confirmation operation control unit) controls the confirmation operation of the movable units 1901 to 1903. In addition, the sub-control unit 1091 (specific control execution unit) may receive the player's operation during the confirmation operation execution period, which is a period for controlling the confirmation operation of the movable units 1901 to 1903. , Does not display the setting screen (does not execute specific control).
By doing in this way, it can prevent that specific control is performed in the state which the movable member is operating.

[External output when an error is detected]
In the slot machine 1001 according to the above embodiment, when the main control unit 1041 detects an abnormality that does not hinder the progress of the game during the reel rotation process, the security signal (a plurality of types of abnormality) is detected immediately after the abnormality is detected. Is not output externally, but after the payout process is completed, an external output of a medal OUT signal (a signal indicating the number of medals given to the player due to the occurrence of winning) A security signal may be output externally before completion.
In this way, an external device (for example, a hall computer) connected to the slot machine 1001 can recognize medals paid out in a situation where an abnormality has occurred during the reel rotation process. That is, it is possible to recognize the game value given in the situation where an abnormality has occurred. In addition, the external device can be distinguished from “abnormality in the game” instead of “abnormality immediately after the game”.

Note that, in the slot machine 1001 according to the above embodiment, the main control unit 1041 finishes granting medals when it detects an abnormality at a predetermined timing within a period from the start of the game to the end of granting medals. Thereafter, before the external output of the medal OUT signal is completed, the external output of the security signal may be started.
By doing so, the external device can distinguish “abnormality in the game” instead of “abnormality immediately after the game”.

In the slot machine 1001 according to the above embodiment, if the main control unit 1041 detects an abnormality that does not hinder the progress of the game during the payout process, the main control unit 1041 does not output the security signal to the outside immediately after detecting the abnormality. Alternatively, the security signal may be externally output after the payout process is completed and before the external output of the medal OUT signal is completed.
In this way, an external device can recognize a medal that has been paid out in a situation where an abnormality has occurred during the payout process. That is, it is possible to recognize the game value given in the situation where an abnormality has occurred.

In the slot machine 1001 according to the above embodiment, when the main control unit 1041 detects an abnormality at a predetermined timing within a period from the start of the medal grant to the end, after the medal grant ends, Before the external output of the medal OUT signal is completed, the external output of the security signal may be started.
By doing in this way, the external device can distinguish “abnormality during payout” instead of “abnormality immediately after payout ends”.

In the slot machine 1001 according to the above embodiment, when the main control unit 1041 detects an abnormality that does not hinder the progress of the game during the reel rotation process, the main control unit 1041 outputs a security signal to the outside immediately after detecting the abnormality. Instead, the security signal may be externally output after the betting number processing by winning a replay is completed and before the external output of the medal OUT signal is completed.
In this way, the external device can recognize that the betting amount has been set in a situation where an abnormality has occurred during the reel rotation process. That is, it is possible to recognize the game value given in the situation where an abnormality has occurred.

In the slot machine 1001 according to the above embodiment, the main control unit 1041 detects the abnormality at a predetermined timing within a period from the start of the game to the end of the medal granting, and the bet number due to the replay winning After finishing the processing, external output of the security signal may be started before the external output of the medal OUT signal is completed.
By doing so, the external device can distinguish “abnormality in the game” instead of “abnormality immediately after the game”.
In the configuration in which external output is performed when abnormality is detected as described above, the main control unit 1041 uses a serial communication clock frequency as a specific frequency when transmitting a security signal or a medal OUT signal by serial communication, and transmits a signal. If it is configured to lower the frequency at the time of non-transmission later than the specific frequency, it is possible to reduce the time required for each control and reduce the generation of radio waves received by other devices.

In the present embodiment, when the main control unit 41 detects an abnormality that does not prevent the progress of the game, the main control unit 41 may perform error processing (game progress stop) after finishing the reel rotation processing.
In this way, it is possible to reduce the complexity of the control of the main control unit 1041 compared to the slot machine that performs error processing before the reel rotation processing is completed.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 1041 may perform error processing (abnormality notification, game progress stop) at the time when an abnormality is detected when an abnormality that may hinder the progress of the game is detected. .
By doing in this way, abnormality notification can be performed more suitably than a slot machine that does not perform error processing when abnormality is detected.

[Control related to AT]
In the above embodiment, the control related to the AT in which the sub-control unit 1091 notifies an advantageous operation mode for the player (AT game number lottery, extra AT game number lottery, navigation effect, management of remaining AT game number, etc.) However, the main control unit 1041 may perform part or all of the control related to the AT.

  In the configuration in which the main control unit 1041 performs control related to the AT, an AT notification means (for example, an LED during AT) that can specify that the AT is in progress, and an operation that can specify an operation mode that is advantageous to the player. A mode notification unit (for example, a navigation LED that can specify the stop order and operation timing of each reel) is provided, and the AT control unit and the operation mode notification unit can be directly driven by the main control unit 1041. Preferably, such a configuration allows the player to recognize necessary information during the AT without depending on the control of the sub-control unit 1091. The AT notification means and the operation mode notification means may be configured to be shared with existing notification means such as the game auxiliary display 1012 or may be configured to include dedicated notification means.

Further, even in such a configuration, the main control unit 1041 transmits a command that can specify whether or not AT is in progress to the sub-control unit 1091, and the sub-control unit 1091 is based on the command. By performing an effect during the AT, the player can be surely recognized that the AT is being performed. Further, the main control unit 1041 transmits a command that can specify the operation mode to be notified to the sub control unit 1091 when the operation mode notification means notifies the operation mode that is advantageous to the player. The control unit 1091 may execute a navigation effect that notifies the same operation mode as the operation mode notified by the operation mode notification unit controlled on the main control unit 1041 side based on the command.
By doing in this way, when the operation mode is notified by the operation mode notification means during AT or the like, the player can be surely recognized the operation mode notified by the operation mode notification means.

Also, the main control unit 1041 has an advantageous operation mode for the player from the contents like an internal winning command when winning a role having a plurality of operation modes having different advantages except during the AT with respect to the sub-control unit 1091. Without sending a command that makes it possible to specify a command, it is possible to specify the type of the winning role when winning a role that has multiple operation modes with different degrees of advantage, but send a command that cannot specify an advantageous operation mode. And during AT, by sending a command that can specify the type of winning combination and advantageous operation mode each time the game is started, or by separately transmitting a command that can specify advantageous operation mode, The sub-control unit 1091 may be configured to identify and notify an operation mode advantageous for the player.
In this way, even if any fraud is made, the sub-control unit 1091 side cannot specify an advantageous operation mode for the player except during the AT, so such fraud causes a disadvantage. Can be prevented.

[Others]
In addition, various effects including the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the image display operation of the image display device, the sound output operation of the speaker, and the lighting operation of the game effect lamp and decoration LED The operation and the like can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, and is scored based on the occurrence of winnings by enclosing gaming media It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives The slot machine 1001 is not limited to those in which bets are set using medals and credits as game values, and slot machines that set bets using game balls as game values or credits as game values. It may be a fully credit type slot machine that uses only the bet number to set the bet amount. When game balls are used as game media, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls. For example, when 3 is set as the bet number, bets are made using 15 game balls. Equivalent to setting the number. The pachinko gaming machine 1 and the slot machine 1001 are not limited to those using only one type of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and gaming balls, for example, a plurality of medals and gaming balls, etc. The game value may be used together. For example, the slot machine 1001 can play a game by setting the number of bets using any of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, and medals, game balls, and the like when a winning occurs. Any of a plurality of types of gaming value may be paid out. As the notice effect that can be executed in such a slot machine, the message effect, the sub-image effect, the synchronous display effect, and the like in the above embodiment may be included.

  In addition, the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the image display operation in the image display device and the sound output operation in the speaker for executing a predetermined effect such as a notice effect as a “background notice”, Furthermore, various performance operations including lighting operations in game effect lamps and decorative LEDs can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, and is scored based on the occurrence of winnings by enclosing gaming media It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in the gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the slot machine 1001, for example. However, it may be distributed in advance by preinstalling in a storage device such as a computer device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  1 Pachinko machine, 5 main image display device, 5a, 5b, 5c, 5d sub image display device, 12 effect control board, 120 effect control CPU, 123 display control unit, 126 effect control unit, 220 signal separation board, 128 129a to 129d, 130, 131, 132, 132a to 132d, 230, 232, 234, 236, 238, 240, 242, 330a, 330b, 330c, 330d, 331a, 331b, 331c, 331d, 332a, 332b, 333a 333b, 333c, 333d, 335a, 335b, 335c, 335d, 422, 424, 426, 428, 430, 610, 612, 614 Signal line, 362 VDP, 400, 400a, 400b, 400c, 400d Liquid crystal control board, 401 401a, 40 1b, 401c, 401d Liquid crystal panel, 402, 402a, 402b, 402c, 402d Display driver, 1001 slot machine, 1041 main control unit, 1051 liquid crystal display, 1090 effect control board, 1091 sub control unit, 191-1903 movable means.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine for playing games,
A transmission means for transmitting data;
Receiving means for receiving data,
The transmission means includes
Data can be transmitted by serial communication that sequentially transmits data in synchronization with a clock signal whose period can be specified according to the signal voltage,
When a specific condition is satisfied, data is transmitted with a clock frequency that is a period that can be specified by the clock signal as a specific frequency,
A gaming machine, wherein after transmitting data with the clock frequency as a specific frequency, the clock frequency is made lower than the specific frequency.

Images